Genesys 8.0 intelligent Workload Distribution Deployment Guide
বিজ্ঞাপন
বিজ্ঞাপন
intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Deployment Guide
The information contained herein is proprietary and confidential and cannot be disclosed or duplicated without the prior written consent of Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 2010–2012 Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
About Genesys
Genesys is the world's leading provider of customer service and contact software - with more than 4,000 customers in
80 countries. Drawing on its more than 20 years of customer service innovation and experience, Genesys is uniquely positioned to help companies bring their people, insights and customer channels together to effectively drive today's customer conversation. Genesys software directs more than 100 million interactions every day, maximizing the value of customer engagement and differentiating the experience by driving personalization and multi-channel customer service - and extending customer service across the enterprise to optimize processes and the performance of customer-facing employees. Go to www.genesyslab.com
for more information.
Each product has its own documentation for online viewing at the Genesys Technical Support website or on the
Documentation Library DVD, which is available from Genesys upon request. For more information, contact your sales representative.
Notice
Although reasonable effort is made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of release, Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc., cannot assume responsibility for any existing errors.
Changes and/or corrections to the information contained in this document may be incorporated in future versions.
Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security
You are responsible for the security of your system. Product administration to prevent unauthorized use is your responsibility. Your system administrator should read all documents provided with this product to fully understand the features available that reduce your risk of incurring charges for unlicensed use of Genesys products.
Trademarks
Genesys and the Genesys logo are registered trademarks of Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. All other company names and logos may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. © 2012 Genesys
Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
Technical Support from VARs
If you have purchased support from a value-added reseller (VAR), please contact the VAR for technical support.
Technical Support from Genesys
If you have purchased support directly from Genesys, please contact Genesys Technical Support at the regional
numbers provided on page 14 . For complete contact information and procedures, refer to the
Genesys Technical
Support Guide
.
Ordering and Licensing Information
Complete information on ordering and licensing Genesys products can be found in the
Genesys Licensing Guide.
Released by
Genesys Telecommunications Laboratories, Inc. www.genesyslab.com
Document Version: 80iwd_dep_02-2012_v8.0.003.00
Table of Contents
List of
Procedures
Preface
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
About intelligent Workload Distribution.................................................... 11
Support for eServices and Third Party Media Servers ....................... 12
Support for Workforce Management................................................... 13
Making Comments on This Document .................................................... 13
Contacting Genesys Technical Support................................................... 14
New in Document Version 8.0.003.00 ................................................ 14
New in Document Version 8.0.002.00 ................................................ 15
intelligent Workload Distribution Overview ....................................... 17
intelligent Workload Distribution Features ............................................... 17
Capturing Tasks from Multiple Sources .............................................. 17
Prioritization of Tasks.......................................................................... 19
Reprioritization of Tasks...................................................................... 19
Centralized Logging............................................................................ 21
Technical Licensing............................................................................. 21
intelligent Workload Distribution Architecture .......................................... 22
iWD Business Process (IWDBP) ............................................................. 25
Deployment Overview .......................................................................... 27
Application Installation ........................................................................ 28
Database Preparation ......................................................................... 28
Deployment Guide 3
Table of Contents
Chapter 3
System Configuration Overview .............................................................. 29
Modules and Components .................................................................. 30
Runtime Nodes ................................................................................... 30
Business Logic Configuration Overview .................................................. 31
Departments and Processes............................................................... 31
Business Calendars ............................................................................ 35
Task Summary: Installing iWD 8.0 ........................................................... 37
Configuration of Application Servers .................................................. 39
Installation Prerequisites .................................................................... 40
iWD Runtime Node Installation................................................................ 46
iWD Manager Installation ........................................................................ 49
iWD Configuration Database Preparation........................................... 50
iWD Manager Installation.................................................................... 51
Enabling ADDP Connections Between iWD and the Genesys Suite ...... 56
Enabling/Disabling ADDP for iWD Manager Application .................... 57
Enabling/Disabling ADDP for iWD Runtime Node .............................. 57
Enabling/Disabling ADDP for BCMS .................................................. 58
Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart ......................... 58
Post-Installation Steps When Using WebSphere Application Server.. 63
Importing iWD Configuration XMLs ......................................................... 64
Creating the Tenant and Solution ............................................................ 65
Installation of iWD Stat Extensions .......................................................... 77
Stat Server Configuration Options ...................................................... 78
Link with Genesys Configuration Server ................................................. 79
Interaction Server Databases .................................................................. 85
Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems ................................. 87
4 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Table of Contents
Chapter 4
iWD Manager Overview........................................................................... 97
General Conditions for Configuring an iWD Manager User ................ 97
iWD Manager Login .......................................................................... 101
iWD Manager User Interface ............................................................ 103
Navigation Panel............................................................................... 104
Unsaved Changes ............................................................................ 109
Import and Export ............................................................................. 114
Managed Tenant Details ................................................................... 118
Lookup Tables................................................................................... 120
Modules and Components..................................................................... 125
Rule Templates ................................................................................. 127
Metrics Templates ............................................................................. 135
Runtime Nodes ................................................................................. 138
Change History ................................................................................. 144
Core iWD Services ........................................................................... 146
Workforce Management.................................................................... 150
Recommended Order of Configuration for iWD Services ................. 150
Service Log Levels ........................................................................... 152
Logging Service ................................................................................ 152
Configuration Server Connector Service .......................................... 153
Interaction Server Connector Service ............................................... 154
Web Service Capture Point............................................................... 157
XML File Capture Point..................................................................... 159
Database Capture Point.................................................................... 161
Deployment Guide 5
Table of Contents
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Appendix A
Business Context Management Service ........................................... 168
Database Service.............................................................................. 169
Data Mart ETL Services.................................................................... 173
Configuration of iWD Current-Day Statistics in CCPulse+................ 178
Workforce Management Connector Service ..................................... 180
Departments and Processes ................................................................. 182
Department Details ........................................................................... 183
Business Calendars .......................................................................... 186
Solution User Access........................................................................ 205
iWD Manager and Task Management ............................................... 207
Task Monitoring................................................................................. 207
Task Operations ................................................................................ 213
High Availability for iWD Components .............................................. 220
Redundancy Support Matrix for iWD Services ................................. 220
Configuring Multiple Business Context Management Services ............. 221
Primary/Backup Configuration .......................................................... 221
Load Balancing Configuration........................................................... 222
Deploying Services on Multiple Runtime Nodes.................................... 222
Interaction Server Redundancy ............................................................. 223
6 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Table of Contents
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
TaskDistributedQueue ...................................................................... 238
TaskAssigned.................................................................................... 239
CompleteTask ................................................................................... 239
TaskCompleted ................................................................................. 239
ResumeTask ..................................................................................... 241
TaskResumed ................................................................................... 241
TaskCanceled ................................................................................... 243
Task Attributes and Interaction Properties............................................. 245
Interaction Custom Properties .......................................................... 248
iWD Business Process (IWDBP) ....................................................... 251
Configuration of List Objects ................................................................. 252
iWD Business Process .......................................................................... 253
Classification Strategy ...................................................................... 256
Prioritization Strategy ........................................................................ 259
Distribution Strategy.......................................................................... 263
Archive Strategy................................................................................ 268
Modifying the iWD Business Process.................................................... 272
Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels
Adapting IWDBP to Serve E-mail Interactions ...................................... 275
Adding Required Properties to Interactions ...................................... 275
Example 2—Departments and Processes ........................................ 291
Example 3—How to Add Another Solution ....................................... 300
iWD Rules and Existing Business Processes ................................. 307
Using iWD Rules in Existing Business Processes................................. 307
Deployment Guide 7
Table of Contents
Supplements
Related Documentation Resources ................................................... 315
Document Conventions ...................................................................... 318
Index
8 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Deployment Guide
List of Procedures
Installing Interaction Server and its databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Installing the iWD Runtime Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating the iWD Configuration database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Installing iWD Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Enabling/disabling ADDP for the iWD Manager application . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enabling/disabling ADDP for the iWD Runtime node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enabling/Disabling ADDP for Business Context Management
Installing iWD Data Mart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Creating the iWD Data Mart Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Building WAR archives for iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node . . . . 63
Import default configuration XMLs into iWD Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Creating an iWD Tenant and iWD Solution in iWD Manager . . . . . . . . . 65
Installing the iWD Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the iWD Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Installing the iWD Stat Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Creating services in iWD Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Configuring logging for iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node . . . . . . . 82
Updating the Interaction Server databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Configuring Distribution Points as Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Adding a Rule Template to your Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Configuring CCPulse+ for iWD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Creating a CCPulse+ template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Configuring iWD to work with WFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Configuring a business calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9
List of Procedures
Defining a decision table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Deploying Services on multiple Runtime Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Configuring a custom interaction property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
10 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Preface
Welcome to the intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0 Deployment Guide. This document describes how to install and configure intelligent Workload
Distribution (iWD).
This document is valid only for the 8.0 release of this product.
Note:
For versions of this document created for other releases of this product, visit the Genesys Technical Support website, or request the
Documentation Library DVD, which you can order by e-mail from
Genesys Order Management at [email protected]
.
This preface contains the following sections:
About intelligent Workload Distribution, page 11
Making Comments on This Document, page 13
Contacting Genesys Technical Support, page 14
Document Change History, page 14
For information about related resources and about the conventions that are used in this document, see the supplementary material starting on
About intelligent Workload Distribution
intelligent Workload Distribution (iWD) is an application that works with the
Genesys Customer Interaction Management (CIM) Platform to distribute tasks to the resources that are best suited to handle them. It is a collection of software components for:
•
Capturing tasks from various enterprise work sources.
•
Applying business rules to classify, prioritize, and reprioritize the tasks.
•
Routing the tasks to agents or knowledge workers in the enterprise.
•
Monitoring and reporting on the intraday and historical status of the tasks and the task handling.
Deployment Guide 11
Preface About intelligent Workload Distribution iWD creates an enterprise-wide task list, or “Global Task List” that is centrally managed and prioritized. As such, it provides visibility for business analysts into the backlog of tasks that have yet to be completed, as well as the status of in-progress and completed tasks.
iWD provides a user interface that is designed specifically for business users— giving them access to not only the Global Task List, but also to a user interface that allows them to author business rules that describe the policies of the enterprise. For example, the business rules can be used to determine what priority and due date should be given to a task that has a specific set of attributes.
Support for eServices and Third Party Media Servers
The iWD 8.0 components work together with Interaction Server to make up the iWD Solution. Interaction Server is an integral component for iWD, whereas formerly it was solely a component of the Genesys eServices solution
(formerly called Multimedia). iWD 8.0 uses the Interaction Server database to store task information, whereas previous releases of iWD used a separate iWD runtime database.
Note: iWD, Interaction Server, E-mail Server (for outbound notifications and acknowledgements), and Knowledge Management together make up the iWD solution. The iWD application refers to the software components that are packaged on the iWD CDs, such as iWD Runtime and iWD Manager. Throughout this document, the iWD solution will be referenced. Remember that this solution shares some common components with the Genesys eServices solution, such as Interaction
Server and, optionally, Genesys Knowledge Management and
Genesys E-mail.
iWD 8.0 can be used with Genesys eServices solutions (for example, Genesys
E-mail, Genesys Chat, and Genesys SMS) as well as with integrations to third party media servers that were built by using the Open Media API. When used together, these combined solutions allow an enterprise to apply business rules to any interaction that is managed through the Genesys Interaction Server, such as e-mail, chat, and SMS interactions. Moreover, these interactions can be managed through iWD Manager’s Global Task List—allowing a business analyst to view the status of these interactions, hold/resume the interactions,
and modify various attributes of the interactions. See also “iWD Business
, and Appendix B, “iWD Business Process
.
12 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Preface Intended Audience
Support for Workforce Management
Beginning in iWD 8.0, the Standard Rules Template now enables you to specify the WFM Activity or Multi-Site Activity to assign to a task as part of a business rule. The
Assign WFM Activity
action has been added to the template.
For example, the following conditions and actions could be configured for a
Rule: if the Product is Widget, and the Customer Segment is Gold, then Set
Priority to 200 and Set WFM Activity to ‘Gold Product Support’
This sets a piece of attached data for the interaction that has the name of the
WFM Activity or Multi-Site Activity. Then, in the routing strategy, you can use that piece of attached data for segmentation to peg the interaction to a specific Interaction Queue or Virtual Queue (the object types that WFM Data
Aggregator is capable of monitoring). Refer to “Workforce Management
Connector Service” on page 180 and the Workforce Management
documentation for more information.
Intended Audience
This document is primarily intended for IT staff who are responsible for the iWD installation and configuration and business analysts who are responsible for department and process configuration. It has been written with the assumption that you have a basic understanding of:
•
The workflow concepts as implemented in the various enterprise source systems (for example, business process management (BPM) systems, host systems, CRM systems, and so on) from which iWD will capture tasks.
•
Network design and operation.
•
Your own network configurations.
Making Comments on This Document
If you especially like or dislike anything about this document, feel free to e-mail your comments to
.
You can comment on what you regard as specific errors or omissions, and on the accuracy, organization, subject matter, or completeness of this document.
Please limit your comments to the scope of this document only and to the way in which the information is presented. Contact your Genesys Account
Representative or Genesys Technical Support if you have suggestions about the product itself.
When you send us comments, you grant Genesys a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate, without incurring any obligation to you.
Deployment Guide 13
Preface Contacting Genesys Technical Support
Contacting Genesys Technical Support
If you have purchased support directly from Genesys, contact Genesys
Technical Support at the following regional numbers:
Region
North and Latin America
Telephone
+888-369-5555 (toll-free)
+506-674-6767
+44-(0)-1276-45-7002
Europe, Middle East, and
Africa [email protected]
Asia Pacific
Malaysia
India
+61-7-3368-6868 (international)
1-800-814-472 (toll-free)
+61-7-3368-6868 (international)
000-800-100-7136 (toll-free)
+61-7-3368-6868 (international)
+81-3-6361-8950 [email protected]
Japan [email protected]
Before contacting technical support, refer to the
Genesys Technical Support Guide
for complete contact information and procedures.
Document History
Document Change History
This section will list topics that are new or that have changed significantly since the first release of this document.
New in Document Version 8.0.003.00
This document has been updated to support the latest release of iWD. The following topics have been added or significantly changed since document version 8.0.002.00:
•
New information about enabling ADDP connections has been added (see
“Enabling ADDP Connections Between iWD and the Genesys Suite” on page 56 ).
•
New information about general conditions for creating an iWD Manager
user have been added (see “General Conditions for Configuring an iWD
).
•
New information about configuring application servers has been added.
See “Configuration of Application Servers” on page 39
.
14 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Preface Document History
•
Figure 3, “Task Life Cycle,” on page 24 has been updated.
•
Compatibility information for Genesys Universal Routing Server (URS) has been added.
•
Various minor textual corrections have been made throughout the document.
•
A note was added to the iWD Data Mart installation procedure indicating that each iWD tenant solution requires its own Data Mart (see
•
A new bullet was added to the Next Steps of the iWD Data Mart installation procedure that is of relevance for users of the Interactive
Insights for iWD product (see
•
A warning was added to the description of the Rule Language Expression
property of conditions and actions (see page 130
).
•
The URL for the iWD website has been updated throughout the document.
The URL is https://sites.google.com/a/iwdlab.com/iwd8/.
New in Document Version 8.0.002.00
This document has been updated to support the latest release of iWD. The following topics have been added or significantly changed since document version 8.0.001.00:
•
The procedures for installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data
Mart have been updated. You no longer need to run the installation package twice if iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node are on the same host.
•
The tables that contain Service properties have been updated. New and previously undocumented properties have been added for most iWD
Services. See “iWD Services” on page 146 .
•
A new section has been added to
Multiple Runtime Nodes” on page 222
.
•
Appendix B, “iWD Business Process (IWDBP),” on page 251 , has been
updated to reflect the updates that were made to the iWD business process
(
IWDBP
).
Deployment Guide 15
Preface Document History
16 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter
1
intelligent Workload
Distribution Overview
This chapter provides an overview of intelligent Workload Distribution (iWD).
It contains the following sections:
intelligent Workload Distribution Features, page 17
intelligent Workload Distribution Architecture, page 22
iWD Business Process (IWDBP), page 25
intelligent Workload Distribution Features
intelligent Workload Distribution (iWD) creates an enterprise-wide task list that is centrally managed and prioritized. It allows work to be presented to the right resource, at the right time, and at the right location. It gets non-real-time work (tasks) from multiple source systems, uses business rules to prioritize or reprioritize the tasks, and then distributes the tasks to the most suitable resource.
Capturing Tasks from Multiple Sources
A key function of the iWD solution is the ability to capture (or get) work from the multitude of work sources in the enterprise, such as documentation management systems, CRM systems, workflow systems, claims administration systems, legacy host systems, and so on. iWD integrates with these source systems through Capture Adapters. The out-of-the-box Capture Adapters are:
•
Web Service for use with source systems that have service-oriented interfaces.
•
XML, for integrating with source systems that include the ability to generate XML files.
Deployment Guide 17
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview intelligent Workload Distribution Features
•
Database, for systems that do not offer service-oriented interfaces or provide XML output capabilities.
Note:
Beginning in version 8.0.2, eServices offers integrated JMS Capture
Point functionality. Refer to the eServices documentation for more information. Version 8.0.210 of eServices (specifically, the Interaction
Server component) also includes integrated XML File Capture Point functionality. Version 8.1.0 of eServices (the Interaction Server component) includes an integrated Database Capture Point.
Capture Points are enabled by a Capture Adapter. Each Capture Point is a specific instantiation of the Adapter for capturing a specific sort of work, that is often associated with a specific business process, such as an order, refund, or return. The Adapter is technology-specific, while the Capture Point can be specific to a source system, a category of work that is derived from a particular source system, or even a specific business process.
Figure 1: Capture Point Process Diagram
To establish a connection with the correct source system, each Capture Point requires the configuration of specific properties such as file directories for
18 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview intelligent Workload Distribution Features
Capture Points that use the XML Capture Adapter or SQL queries for Capture
Points that use the Database Capture Adapter.
Note:
In some configurations, the Capture Point is not necessarily specific to a business process. For example, one Capture Point can support capturing orders, billing, and complaints.
Prioritization of Tasks
Prioritization is the process by which iWD arranges the Global Task List in order of priority or importance, based on business rules that are configured at the Global level, or for the Capture Point, Department, and Process. The fulfillment of one task over another might provide a benefit to the business, such as increased revenue, decreased costs, improved customer satisfaction, or avoidance of a penalty or fine.
Business rules within iWD are based on Business Rule Templates that are provided out-of-the-box with the iWD installation, or created by IT personnel.
Business rule templates are the foundation upon which users create or modify existing business rules that govern iWD. Business users can be empowered to create or modify rules without involving IT personnel.
Business rules can also be used to facilitate a more informed prioritization decision by leveraging existing enterprise web services to collect additional task-related information. For example, you can configure a rule that, upon the capture of any order, retrieves the customer's current credit score. The score
(such as poor) is then attached to the task and can be used downstream by another business rule for setting priority, or it can be used later within a
Genesys routing strategy for determining to whom the task should be routed
(for example, to a credit-granting department prior to sales).
Reprioritization of Tasks
At any time, the information that is related to a task can change and affect the task’s priority. A simple example of where reprioritization can affect the initial priority that is set is the time that remains before the due date of a task. For example, assume that you have a time-sensitive process that includes tasks that involve dispute resolution. If the disputes are not resolved within a specific number of days (for example, 10 days), the organization might be fined. You can configure a business rule that specifies that if such a task is within two days of its due date, the task should be reprioritized with the highest priority, so that it is immediately assigned to an agent.
iWD can be configured so that each captured task receives a task reprioritization interval, when business rules are applied and new values are set for the task. Some tasks might increase in priority, while others might decrease.
Deployment Guide 19
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview intelligent Workload Distribution Features
All business rules have a unique identifier and description. When a rule is applied, the rule name and value are captured and stored for future business reporting, including business and internal auditing.
Task Distribution
All iWD tasks are managed through the Genesys Interaction Server and are assigned (routed) to agents or knowledge workers by the Genesys Universal
Routing Server (URS). A Distribution Point is an optional attribute of a task that gets associated to a task as part of a business rule. It can then be used to help refine how the task is managed by Interaction Server and URS. For example, logic can be written into a routing strategy that uses the Distribution
Point attribute of a task to make decisions about the types of resources or locations to which the task should be routed.
The Distribution Point is also propagated to the iWD Data Mart as a dimension that can be used for creating reports.
One example of how Distribution Points can be used is to set up a Distribution
Point to represent a contact center and a separate Distribution Point to represent an outsourcer who will handle the tasks that are related to several iWD business processes. The appropriate Distribution Point will get associated to a task as part of the logic of a business rule—thus, attaching the Distribution
Point name as an attribute of the task. Within the routing strategy that handles the assignment of the tasks to the knowledge workers, this attribute can be read, assigned to a local strategy variable, and then used to route to the appropriate Agent Group at the right location. Reports can be generated that segment the task handling by the different resource types who handled the tasks (internal contact center versus outsourcer, in this example).
Note:
The role of a Distribution Point has changed significantly between iWD 7.6.1 and iWD 8.0. Users of iWD 7.6.1 who are migrating to iWD 8.0 should know that Distribution Points are no longer separate iWD services that define specific Interaction Server queues and thresholds to which iWD tasks will be distributed. Instead, in iWD
8.0, all tasks are immediately distributed to Interaction Server upon task capture, and the Distribution Point is used mainly as a reporting dimension, as well as a way to help segment tasks to guide the assignment that is defined in the routing strategy logic
.
Although iWD performs prioritization and reprioritization, it does so only to set values for priority routing within the Genesys CIM Platform. URS can leverage the iWD-calculated priority and business values in its routing strategies, or it might calculate its own; in either case, URS ensures that the most critical tasks are presented to agents first. URS continues to reevaluate priority for tasks that it has received against real-time voice and other non-voice interactions—ensuring that the most important is presented next.
20 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview intelligent Workload Distribution Features
Reporting
iWD monitors the entire lifecycle of tasks, from the moment that they are captured until they are archived and stopped (removed from the system). iWD provides business-activity monitoring of a number of events, including the following:
•
New—The point at which the task was captured by the Capture Point
•
Process/Reprioritization Rules Applied—All process rules that are applied to the task, as well as the values that are calculated and assigned to the task
•
Queued—The point at which the task has been classified and prioritized and is awaiting potential reprioritization or assignment to a resource
•
Assigned—When the task was assigned to an agent for processing
•
Transfer/Transfer to Queue—Whether the agent transferred the task to another agent or back to the queue
•
Held—Whether the task was held (manual hold)
Each record is timestamped and stored in the iWD Data Mart, where the data that is collected can be leveraged in third-party reporting applications.
Note:
In addition to the iWD Data Mart, iWD 8.0 interoperates with
Interaction Concentrator and Genesys Info Mart for historical reporting. Certain fact tables (for example,
MMEDIA_IXN_FACT_EXT
and
MMEDIA_SEG_FACT_EXT)
store media-specific facts about open media as well as multimedia interactions and multimedia interaction segments. iWD tasks all flow through Interaction Server queues as Open Media interactions, so that these tables are populated with iWD data.
Refer to the Interaction Concentrator and Genesys Info Mart documentation for more information.
Centralized Logging
iWD 8.0 also has a centralized logging feature that supports logging of iWD log messages through Genesys Message Server. This feature provides the additional capabilities of viewing these log messages through a centralized log viewer (such as that included in Genesys Administrator) as well as the ability to generate alarms and SNMP traps through Genesys Solution Control Server.
Refer to “Logging” on page 82 for information about configuring centralized
logging.
Technical Licensing
To view tasks (interactions) in the iWD Global Task List, iWD Manager connects to Interaction Server on behalf of an agent. The user who is logged into iWD Manager must have a Place ID configured, and the connection to
Deployment Guide 21
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview intelligent Workload Distribution Architecture
Interaction Server is made on behalf of this user who has this Place ID.The number of iWD Manager users cannot exceed the number of ics_multi_media_agent_seat
technical licenses that you have provisioned in your FlexLM license file. Keep in mind that Interaction Server also uses agent seat licenses for agents who will be accepting and processing tasks
(interactions) at their agent desktops, so that the total number of ics_multi_media_agent_seat
technical licenses that you have should account for not only the number of concurrent agents who are processing tasks at their desktops, but also the number of concurrent users who will be accessing the
Global Task List.
To process the iWD tasks at the agent desktop, Interaction Server also checks the number of licenses that are provisioned in the FlexLM license file for each media type that is being handled by the agents. These media type technical licenses are not required for any iWD Manager usage.
If you plan to use iWD to process e-mails that are not being “captured” through the Genesys E-mail Server, then it is best to use a custom media type, rather than the media type email
. This is because handling the media type email
requires a specific FlexLM license to be checked out
( ics_email_webform_channel
), whereas there is a separate general FlexLM license used for all custom media types ( ics_custom_media_channel ). For this reason, it is recommended to create a custom media type (such as email1
) for work items of type “ email
” that are not being captured by the Genesys E-mail
Server.
Please refer to the Genesys Licensing Guide for more information.
intelligent Workload Distribution
Architecture
The core iWD solution building blocks are implemented as Java services, which can run on several different Java application servers. iWD does not rely on any J2EE-specific functions.
22 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview intelligent Workload Distribution Architecture
Figure 2 illustrates the main intelligent Workload Distribution building blocks
(services), the relationships among them, and the external components that are involved.
Figure 2: intelligent Workload Distribution High-Level Architecture
Deployment Guide 23
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview
Task Life Cycle
Figure 3 illustrates the overall task life cycle in iWD:
New in This Release
Figure 3: Task Life Cycle
New in This Release
iWD 8.0 includes the following new features:
•
iWD now stores all tasks in the Interaction Server database, instead of an independent iWD runtime database.
•
iWD no longer relies on T-Server to propagate statistics from iWD to Stat
Server.
•
iWD now uses Configuration Server authentication.
•
The iWD rules service is invoked as an External server from within a routing strategy, which opens up the ability for business processes that are using Genesys eServices media servers such as Genesys E-mail, Genesys
Chat, and Genesys SMS to use business rules for classification and prioritization.
24 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview iWD Business Process (IWDBP)
•
New OS support for server components:
AIX 6.1
Windows Server 2008
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5
Solaris 10
•
New database support
Oracle 10g and 11g RAC
Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and 2008
•
New web-browser support:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
•
Internationalization
•
Localization kit
•
End-to-end sample application
iWD Business Process (IWDBP)
iWD 8.0 is packaged with an out-of-the-box Business Process. The Business
Process is installed with the iWD Setup Utility and is made up of a set of
Interaction Queues that map to the iWD state model
(NEW, ERRORHELD,
CAPTURED, COMPLETED, CANCELED, REJECTED, and QUEUED ). From this Business
Process, interactions are submitted to routing strategies. From within a routing strategy, the External Service Protocol (ESP) block is used to call the iWD
Rules Service. This approach is used to apply classification and prioritization rules to the interaction. When a user goes to the Global Task List view in iWD
Manager, to monitor the interactions that are in various states, this component will communicate with Interaction Server in order to retrieve the list of interactions and their attributes.
This out-of-the-box Genesys iWD Business Process maps to the iWD state model, allowing you to use iWD-based reporting for other interaction types
(for example, you might want to track Genesys e-mails along with other task types, under the same Department or Process).
This Genesys iWD Business Process is completely optional for iWD customers who are using Genesys E-mail, Genesys Chat, Genesys SMS, or even third-party e-mail, SMS, or chat. For Genesys eServices customers, the
Genesys iWD Business Process can be left unchanged if you want to use business rules only. In this scenario, what would change would be the routing strategies. The strategies would use the ESP block to invoke the iWD business rules service.
This means that existing Genesys E-mail, Chat or SMS/MMS customers can use the business rules within iWD without having to change their Genesys
Business Processes; or, to access some additional functionality, changes can be made to the Business Processes.
Deployment Guide 25
Chapter 1: intelligent Workload Distribution Overview iWD Business Process (IWDBP)
For a detailed description of the iWD Business Process, including its
strategies, refer to Appendix B on page 251
.
26 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter
2
Deployment Overview
This chapter provides an overview of iWD deployment.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Installation Overview, page 27
System Configuration Overview, page 29
Business Logic Configuration Overview, page 31
Installation Overview
Installation is the initial iWD deployment phase that results in a fully functional iWD Manager application and prepared iWD runtime nodes. iWD
Manager will be used for the rest of the deployment configuration, while runtime nodes are containers in which the iWD runtime services will run.
The installation phase requires knowledge of the overall system infrastructure in which iWD is being deployed, such as Java application server and database configuration. This phase should typically be implemented by IT personnel.
iWD installation consists of two steps:
•
“Application Installation” on page 28
.
•
“Database Preparation” on page 28 .
Note:
For detailed installation information, see Chapter 3, “Installation,” on page 37 .
Compatibility with
URS
iWD 8.0 is not compatible with URS 7.5.
Deployment Guide 27
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview Installation Overview
Application Installation
After the iWD operational databases have been prepared, the iWD Manager application and iWD runtime nodes can be installed. Both of these components run on a Java application server.
Note:
Refer to the Genesys Supported Operating Environment Reference
Manual for a list of the Java application servers that are supported in iWD.
A basic iWD deployment utilizes a single instance of iWD Manager, as well as a single instance of an iWD runtime node. In more complex scenarios, such as multi-tenant, high-volume or high-availability deployments, multiple iWD runtime node instances can be installed. Such deployments provide more controlled resource partitioning and allow load distribution across multiple physical servers.
Database Preparation
The first step of iWD installation is the database preparation. A basic iWD deployment utilizes two operational databases:
•
iWD Configuration database—Stores iWD system and business logic
configuration such as services, processes, and rules (see Chapter 4,
“Configuration,” on page 97 for descriptions of these objects).
•
Interaction Server database—iWD tasks are stored in the Interaction Server database. Therefore, make sure that you have installed and configured the
Interaction Server and its associated database, as described in the eServices
(Multimedia) 8.0 Deployment Guide.
Note:
For a list of the database engines that are supported by the iWD application and Interaction Server, refer to the Genesys Supported
Operating Environment Reference Manual. Please note that the iWD might not support all of the databases that are supported by Interaction
Server.
Preparation of the iWD Configuration database requires that actions be performed manually via the database’s administrative interface:
1. Creation of a database
2. Creation of a database user account or accounts
The rest of the database setup, such as creation of tables and indexes, is performed automatically by iWD. Alternatively, if your database administrator prefers to inspect the SQL statements prior to the database initialization and
table creation, iWD includes a command-line utility for this. See “iWD
Configuration Database Upgrade Utility (dbup)” on page 55 .
28 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview System Configuration Overview
System Configuration Overview
iWD system configuration results in a fully set-up iWD system infrastructure that consists of tenants, solutions, and services that enable iWD functionality.
The iWD system configuration phase requires knowledge of the overall system infrastructure in which iWD is being deployed, such as Java application server and database configuration.
The following topics provide an overview of different system configuration aspects:
•
•
•
For a detailed system configuration reference, see Chapter 4, “Configuration,” on page 97
—specifically, the following sections: “General Configuration” on page 111
, “Modules and Components” on page 125
.
Tenants
iWD configuration supports multi-tenancy. iWD automatically creates a root tenant that is named System by default. Although it is possible to configure iWD solutions, services, and business logic directly at the
System
tenant level, it is recommended that you create a subtenant for that configuration. In iWD terminology, such a subtenant is called a managed tenant. This managed tenant is associated directly with a tenant defined in Genesys Configuration Server. In a single-tenant environment the configured managed tenant must map to the
Resources
tenant in Genesys Configuration Server.
A user who is configuring the system in iWD Manager can have access to one or more tenants. Access is defined by the security policy that is configured per tenant. The policy allows definition of an arbitrary numbers of user roles, where each role is mapped to a single Genesys Configuration Server Access
Group and has a number of associated iWD permissions. The actual permissions that a user has are then determined based on the Configuration
Server Access Groups to which the user belongs.
The modules that are accessible to the tenant are managed by the parent. A module by itself represents specific iWD functionality, such as “XML
Capture” or “iWD Rules.” The specific functionality is implemented as a collection of components that can be services or business logic templates (such as rules templates).
Note:
The tenancy model that is supported in the iWD application currently has a one-to-one relationship with the tenancy model in Genesys
Configuration Server.
Deployment Guide 29
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview System Configuration Overview
Multi-tenant
Configurations
If you are using a Multi-Tenant Configuration Server, please be aware that the iWD tenant can only access resources (such as Skills and Agent Groups) that are specifically configured under the corresponding Genesys Configuration
Server Tenant in Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator. Therefore, any Skills, Agent Groups, or other resources that are configured at the
Environment Level will not be accessible in rules at a child-tenant level in iWD. To make these resources accessible, they must be configured as resources under the child tenant in Configuration Server.
Modules and Components
Modules and components define iWD functionality:
•
A component is an atomic object that provides a specific iWD function.
The following component types are used in iWD:
Service template: This component represents an iWD service that implements specific functionality. Service templates are preconfigured and thus cannot be changed in iWD Manager. Service instances that are based on service templates, however, are configurable.
Rule template
•
A module is a group of components.
Solutions
Solutions are used for partitioning logical and physical resources for purposes of user access control and load partitioning (performance). Normally there will be one Solution per Tenant.
A solution in iWD represents a runtime environment, which is composed of the following:
•
Runtime nodes (see
page 30 )—iWD runtime application instances that are
within the Java application server in which services are being run
•
)—Services that enable iWD functionality, such as capture, rules, and logging
•
Business logic configuration (see page 31
)—iWD departments, processes, rules, and more.
Multiple solution instances can be configured per tenant, if necessary (for example, “Production” and “Test”).
Runtime nodes require simple preparation during installation, as described in
“Installation Overview” on page 27 .
Runtime Nodes
Runtime nodes are containers for iWD services that enable the necessary service management infrastructure. Physically, runtime nodes are instances of the iWD runtime application and are run within a Java application server.
30 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview Business Logic Configuration Overview
Services that run within a runtime node are configured in (and managed through) the iWD Manager application.
Services
iWD Services implement actual iWD functionality, such as capturing tasks or
loading data into the Data Mart. Refer to “iWD Services” on page 146 for
more information about iWD Services, including the recommended order of configuration.
Business Logic Configuration Overview
The iWD business logic configuration phase is where iWD business context is introduced. This includes definition of departments, processes, business rules, and business calendars. After this phase, iWD is fully functional and can start processing tasks.
The iWD system configuration phase requires knowledge of business context for tasks that will be handled by iWD. This includes business processes, service-level agreements (SLAs), and other factors that influence task-handling logic.
The following topics provide an overview of different business configuration aspects:
•
“Departments and Processes” on page 31
•
•
“Task Classification” on page 33
•
“Task Prioritization” on page 34
•
“Business Calendars” on page 35
of
.
Departments and Processes
Departments represent enterprise departments for which iWD will perform task prioritization and routing. Processes represent the business processes that are within those enterprise departments. In iWD, processes are always grouped within (associated with) a department. Departments and Processes allow for the definition of task-handling business rules that are specific to a department
or process context. For more information about rules, see both “Task
and “Task Prioritization” on page 34
.
Each department and process also allows for the definition of an arbitrary number of custom attributes that provide additional enterprise-specific context
for reporting purposes. Figure 4
shows an example of a process.
Deployment Guide 31
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview Business Logic Configuration Overview
Figure 4: Example Process
Rules
As part of configuring departments and processes in iWD, you will configure and associate rules. These rules will define the task-handling business logic that is applicable to the departments and/or processes. Generally, a rule is represented by one or more conditions and one or more actions. If all of the conditions are true, all of the actions will be executed. If any condition is not true, none of the actions will be executed.
Rules are expressed in an easy-to-understand human language, such as, “If task is due in 10 or more minutes, increase priority by 10.” The implementation details are hidden in rule templates, and users who configure business logic deal only with high-level logical expressions.
Rules can be defined in one of two ways: as a linear rule or as a decision table.
Linear rules are intended for complex rules that have many conditions. Each
32 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview Business Logic Configuration Overview
condition or action is represented by a single line in the rule. Figure 5 shows an
example of a linear rule.
Figure 5: Linear Rule Example
Decision tables represent a more compact form of rule representation; however, they might not be as well suited to complex rules. In a decision table, multiple rules are grouped together, so that each condition or action is represented by a column in a table, and each row represents a rule. The number and type of conditions and actions (columns) is constant across all of the rules
shows an example of a decision table.
Figure 6: Decision Table Example
Task Classification
The primary purpose of task classification is to associate a task with a configured process. Additionally, classification can assign different task attributes, such as business value and due time.
Task-classification logic is expressed via business rules that can be defined for four different contexts:
•
Global Rules
•
Capture Point
•
Department
•
Process
If rules are defined for more than one context, they are applied in sequence, as previously listed. After a process has been selected for a task, additional rules are applied that have been defined for the selected process and its associated department.
Figure 7 shows an example of Task Classification.
Deployment Guide 33
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview Business Logic Configuration Overview
Figure 7: Task Classification
For more information about task classification, refer to Appendix B on page 251
, specifically “Classification Strategy” on page 256 .
Task Prioritization
The primary purpose of task prioritization is dynamic priority calculation, where dynamic means that the task priority can be recalculated multiple times during the task’s life cycle. As with task classification, prioritization logic is expressed via rules.
Prioritization rules are initially applied immediately after department-/process-level classification rules and then reapplied after a specified reprioritization period. The reprioritization period is expressed in the
same way as any other rule action, as illustrated in Figure 8
.
Figure 8: Task Prioritization
34 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview Business Logic Configuration Overview
If a reprioritization period is not set for a task during the prioritization phase in business rules, the
IWD_reprioritizeDateTime
attribute is set to
Dec 31, 2030
.
Therefore, for all intents and purposes. the task will not undergo further reprioritization unless it is restarted.
The Standard Rules Template includes two rule conditions that should be used in prioritization rules to ensure that the reprioritization interval is set correctly, while avoiding any unnecessary immediate reprioritization of a task (that is, the first time prioritization rules are evaluated).
For example, suppose you have a task that, during the classification phase, gets an initial priority of 100. You wish to increase the priority by 10 every 1 hour, if the task is due in less than 24 hours. You want to do the first check 10 minutes after the task is classified. You would set this up by using two different prioritization rules, configured in the order shown below.
first rule, which includes the
Is first prioritization condition. The second rule, shown in
Is reprioritization
condition.
Figure 9: Rule 1—Is First Prioritization
Figure 10: Rule 2—Is Reprioritization
For more information about task prioritization, refer to Appendix B on page 251
, specifically “Prioritization Strategy” on page 259 .
Business Calendars
A business calendar is a set of configuration parameters that define working days and hours, as well as holidays that apply to the business. In its simplest form, the business calendar would consist of definitions for both a working week and working hours that apply to all working days. A definition of a working week from Monday to Friday—in which each day starts at 9:00 AM and ends at 5:00 PM—is a classic example of a simple business calendar. If necessary, exceptions to the usual working schedule (public holidays, business-specific holidays, nonstandard working hours, and so on) can be added to the business calendar. Business calendars can be used in iWD rules to perform date and time calculations that take into account the working schedule of the business. Business Calendars have to be assigned by a rule, and this rule
Deployment Guide 35
Chapter 2: Deployment Overview Business Logic Configuration Overview
must run before other rules that use the business calendar. Figure 11
shows a sample business calendar.
Figure 11: Business Calendar
36 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter
3
Installation
This chapter provides information about installing iWD.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Task Summary: Installing iWD 8.0, page 37
Preparing for Installation, page 39
Interaction Server Installation, page 42
iWD Runtime Node Installation, page 46
iWD Manager Installation, page 49
Enabling ADDP Connections Between iWD and the Genesys Suite, page 56
Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart, page 58
Importing iWD Configuration XMLs, page 64
Creating the Tenant and Solution, page 65
Installation of iWD Stat Extensions, page 77
Link with Genesys Configuration Server, page 79
Interaction Server Databases, page 85
Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems, page 87
Task Summary: Installing iWD 8.0
The following table outlines the task flow for installing iWD 8.0. The procedures in this table provide instructions about installing iWD components on Windows hosts. For information about installing on Unix-based operating
systems, refer to “Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems” on page 87 .
Deployment Guide 37
Chapter 3: Installation Task Summary: Installing iWD 8.0
Task Summary: Installing iWD 8.0
Objective
1. Prepare for installation and review prerequisites.
2. Install Interaction Server
3. Install iWD Runtime Node and associate a Person account to the iWD
Runtime Node application.
•
Procedure: Installing the iWD Runtime Node, on page 46
.
•
Procedure: Associating a Person’s account with the iWD
Runtime Node application, on page 49
4. Install iWD Manager
5. Install iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart.
•
Procedure: Creating the iWD Configuration database, on page 50
.
•
Procedure: Installing iWD Manager, on page 51
.
•
Procedure: Installing iWD Rules, on page 59 .
•
Procedure: Installing iWD Capture, on page 60
.
•
Procedure: Installing iWD Data Mart, on page 61
.
•
Procedure: Creating the iWD Data Mart Database, on page 62
.
6. Create an iWD Tenant and iWD
Solution in iWD Manager
7. Install and run the iWD Setup Utility to configure various mandatory configuration objects.
Procedure: Creating an iWD Tenant and iWD Solution in iWD Manager,
•
•
.
Procedure: Installing the iWD Setup Utility,
Procedure: Using the iWD Setup Utility, on
8. Install iWD Stat Server Extensions.
9. Link the iWD components with
Genesys Configuration Server.
10.Configure logging for iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node.
11. Update the Interaction Server databases and Event Log DAP.
Related Procedures and Actions
• Ensure that your environment meets the prerequisites
that are outlined in “Installation Prerequisites ” on page 40
.
•
Ensure that the required CDs are available. See “CD
.
iWD 8.0 requires Interaction Server 8.0.1 or higher. If your environment does not have an instance of Interaction Server installed already (such as in an eServices solution), you must
install one. See Procedure: Installing Interaction Server and its databases, on page 43
.
Procedure: Installing the iWD Stat Extensions, on page 78 .
Procedure: Creating services in iWD Manager, on page 80
.
Procedure: Configuring logging for iWD Manager and iWD
Procedure: Updating the Interaction Server databases, on
38 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Preparing for Installation
Task Summary: Installing iWD 8.0 (Continued)
Objective Related Procedures and Actions
12.Configure remaining iWD services and objects.
See Chapter 4, “Configuration,” on page 97
.
13.Optional: Install and configure the sample application to learn more about the functionality of iWD and business rules.
See “Sample Application” on page 94
.
Preparing for Installation
This section describes how to prepare for the iWD installation. It contains the following topics:
•
“Configuration of Application Servers”
•
•
Note:
Stop your Tomcat web application server. Stopping is optional for
WebSphere Application Server.
Configuration of Application Servers
It is necessary to configure application servers, both Apache Tomcat (Tomcat) and IBM WebSphere (WebSphere) in order to successfully run the iWD.
Installing on Tomcat
If Tomcat is running as Windows service:
•
Add the following Java options to the Tomcat service configuration:
-XX:MaxPermSize=128m
-Dcom.genesyslab.platform.commons.connection.factory.class=com.
genesyslab.platform.commons.connection.impl.netty.NettyConnectio
nFactory
•
Configure the initial and maximum memory pools to
512
and
1024 megabytes (or
512
and
1500
, if iWD Data Mart will be running on that particular instance of Tomcat).
If Tomcat is running as Windows console application:
•
Add the following to the setenv.bat
file:
Deployment Guide 39
Chapter 3: Installation Preparing for Installation set JAVA_OPTS=-XX:MaxPermSize=128m -Xms512M -Xmx1024M
-Dcom.genesyslab.platform.commons.connection.factory.class=com.
genesyslab.platform.commons.connection.impl.netty.NettyConnectionFa
ctory
•
If this instance will be running iWD Data Mart, use –
Xmx1500M
or more instead of –
Xmx1024M
, if allowed by the operating system.
On UNIX machines:
•
Edit the setenv.sh
file and add the following:
export JAVA_OPTS="-XX:MaxPermSize=128m -Xms512M -Xmx1024M
-Dcom.genesyslab.platform.commons.connection.factory.class=com.
genesyslab.platform.commons.connection.impl.netty.NettyConnection
Factory”
If this instance will be running iWD Data Mart, use –
Xmx1500M
or more instead of – Xmx1024M , if allowed by the operating system.
setenv.sh and setenv.bat files:
By default, setenv.sh
and setenv.bat
files are not present after the installation of Tomcat, so you need to create them manually and correctly configure the access rights on UNIX machines properly for these files.
Installing on WebSphere
•
Log in to the WebSphere Integrated Solution Console.
•
Select
Servers>Application Servers> and select a server from the list.
•
Then continue to
>Server Infrastructure, Java and Process
Management>Process Definition>Java Virtual Machine.
•
In
Generic JVM Arguments
, add these settings, if not present:
-XX:MaxPermSize=128m
-Dcom.genesyslab.platform.commons.connection.factory.class=com.
genesyslab.platform.commons.connection.impl.netty.Netty
ConnectionFactory
•
Configure the initial and maximum heap size, using the same guidelines as for Tomcat.
•
If installing on WebSphere 7.0 or later, add this Generic JVM parameter:
-Dorg.ajax4jsf.cache.CacheFactory=org.ajax4jsf.cache.OSCacheCache
Factory
•
Restart the application server.
Installation Prerequisites
Before you start the installation, ensure that the environment meets the following prerequisites:
40 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Preparing for Installation
•
Interaction Server 8.0.1 or later is installed on a computer that can communicate with the computer on which the iWD node software is going
to be installed. Refer to “Interaction Server Installation” on page 42
for information about how to install an instance of Interaction Server to use with iWD.
•
A supported web application server, such as Tomcat or WebSphere, is installed on the computer(s) on which iWD will be installed.
Tomcat can be downloaded from the Apache website at http://tomcat.apache.org/download-60.cgi
Note:
The user under whose context the iWD Runtime Node web application (for example,
iwd_node
) is running must have security permission to write to the local file system. Files are copied to the iwd_node/WEB-INF/config
directory when an iWD solution is deployed.
•
A supported database server is installed for the iWD Manager database and the iWD Data Mart.
•
Java SDK is installed. For customers using Tomcat, Genesys only supports
Java SDK 6.
Java SDK can be downloaded from the following website: http://java.sun.com/javase/downloads/index.jsp
Note:
Refer to the Genesys Supported Operating Environment Reference
Manual for supported Java application servers and database servers.
•
iWD 8.0 is compatible only with release 7.6.200.04 and higher of Genesys
Universal Routing Server.
CD Structure
iWD software is packaged on the following CDs:
•
iWD Runtime, Rules, and Manager CD
•
iWD Data Mart, Stat Extensions, and Capture CD
•
Optionally, you might use the iWD WebSphere MQ Capture Adapter, a component that allows iWD to capture tasks from source systems that use
IBM WebSphere MQ as a message bus. This component is packaged on its
Deployment Guide 41
Chapter 3: Installation Interaction Server Installation own CD. Refer to the iWD WebSphere MQ Capture Adapter Reference
Guide for information about this component, its CD, and installation instructions.
Note:
Beginning in version 8.0.2, eServices offers integrated JMS Capture
Point functionality. Refer to the eServices documentation for more information. Version 8.0.210 of eServices (specifically, the Interaction
Server component) also includes integrated XML File Capture Point functionality. Version 8.1.0 of eServices (the Interaction Server component) includes an integrated Database Capture Point.
iWD Runtime, Rules, and Manager CD
This CD contains the following components:
•
iWD Setup Utility—A wizard-based utility that is used during the initial deployment of iWD to create many of the required configuration objects in
Genesys Configuration Server.
•
iWD Runtime Node—The core components of iWD that handle tasks after they are captured from a source system.
•
iWD Manager—A graphical user interface (GUI) for both technical and business configuration of the iWD solution, including the configuration of business rules. iWD Manager is also used for real-time management of tasks.
•
iWD Rules—The components of iWD that allow classification and prioritization rules to be executed against tasks.
iWD Data Mart, Stat Extensions, and Capture CD
This CD contains the following components:
•
iWD Capture—Out-of-the-box Capture Adapters that allow iWD to capture tasks from a wide variety of source systems through Web Services,
XML files, or direct database access.
•
iWD Stat Extensions—Stat Server Java Extensions that provide Stat Server clients, such as CCPulse+, the ability to request and display current-day statistics from iWD’s Data Mart.
•
iWD Data Mart—A repository for iWD reporting data including current-day and historical statistics.
Interaction Server Installation
Interaction Server is required for iWD 8.0. If you are an existing eServices customer, and Interaction Server and its databases are already installed and
42 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Interaction Server Installation configured for your environment, you can proceed with
Procedure: Installing the iWD Runtime Node, on page 46
. Otherwise, perform the steps in the following procedure.
Procedure:
Installing Interaction Server and its databases
Purpose: To install an instance of Interaction Server and create the Interaction
Server database and Event Log database.
Note:
The following procedure is a general procedure. Please work with your enterprise’s database administrator to follow the specific procedure that is required by your database management system and your enterprise policies.
Prerequisites
•
The Interaction Management CD.
•
Review the requirements for technical licensing. See “Technical
.
Create the
Databases
Create the DAP
Application
Objects
Start of procedure
1. Ensure that the database server is running.
2. Log on to the database server’s administrative interface (such as Oracle
Enterprise Manager).
3. Create a new database (for example, ixn_db
). This database will be used by
Interaction Server to store interaction data.
4. Create a new database (for example, ixn_eventlog_db
). This database will be used to store event-logging details (refer to the eServices
(Multimedia) 8.0 User’s Guide for more information about the Event Log database).
5. In Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, create two Database
Access Point (DAP)
Application
objects: one for the Interaction Server database, and one for the Event Log database.
a. On the
General
tab, enter a name for the DAP and select the DB Server
Application
object that will be used by the DAP to connect to the database.
Deployment Guide 43
Chapter 3: Installation Interaction Server Installation
b. On the
DB Info
tab, enter the details that will be used to connect to the database:
DBMS Name
: The name of the host on which the DBMS is located.
DBMS Typ e: The type of database management system that is being used in your environment.
Database Name
: The name that you specified for the database.
User Name
: The user name of the DBMS user.
Password
: The password that is used to connect to the DBMS.
Re-enter Password
: Enter the password again.
c.
Add the following option to the Event Log Database Access Point
(DAP), and also to the to the Interaction Server Interactions DAP application object.
On the
Options
tab, create a new section called jdbc.
In the jdbc section, create an option called url
. For the option value, enter your jdbc connection string to the Interaction Server Event Log database or
Interaction Server Interactions database that is running on your database server.
If you are using Oracle database, use jdbc:evo:oracle:@ rather than jdbc:oracle:thin:@ or other providers.
Create the
Interaction Server
Application Object
Example: jdbc:evo:oracle:@//<oracle_host>:1521/<SID>.
d. Only for the Interaction Server Event Log DAP:
On the
Options
tab, create a new section called logger-settings
.
e.
In this section, create a new option called batch-size a nd set its value to
100
.
f.
Click
Apply to save the configuration.
6. Create the Interaction Server
Application
object. On the Interaction
Management CD, in the templates
folder, you will find the application template for Interaction Server. Import the template into Configuration
Manager or Genesys Administrator
7. Create a new
Application
object, based on the template.
a. On the
General
tab, enter a name for your Interaction Server.
b. On the
Server Info
tab, select the host on which Interaction Server will be installed, and enter the port that Interaction Server will use to communicate.
c.
On the
Start Info
tab, enter any text into the
Working Directory,
Command Line,
and
Command Line Arguments fields (these fields will be repopulated with the correct information when Interaction Server is installed, but something must be entered in these fields now in order to save the
Application
object).
d. On the
Connections
tab, add connections to the two DAPs that you created earlier in this procedure.
44 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Interaction Server Installation
Install Interaction
Server e.
The
Options
tab contains the configuration options for Interaction
Server. Refer to the eServices (Multimedia) 8.0 Reference Manual for detailed descriptions of the options. Be sure to update the options for the license file.
There is a specific Interaction Server configuration option named completed-queues
that specifies a list of queues for completed interactions. When an interaction is placed into one of these queues, the
CompletedAt
timestamp is set for that interaction. This is also the timestamp that will be used to calculate the
Age
of the interaction that is displayed on the Global Task List. Therefore, you should configure this option appropriately based on how you want this
Age
. For example, you may wish to set it to: iWD_Completed, iWD_Canceled, iWD_Rejected
Section: settings
Option name: completed-queues
Valid values: comma-separated list of queue names
Click
Apply to save the configuration.
8. Open the properties of the Universal Routing Server (URS)
Application object. On the
Connections
tab, add a connection to the Interaction Server that you just created.
9. A Multimedia Switching Office and Multimedia Switch must be created in
Genesys Configuration Database, to support Stat Server and URS operations. Refer to the eServices 8.0 Deployment Guide for more details on these topics.
10. Install Interaction Server.
a. From the computer on which Interaction Server will be installed, locate and double-click Setup.exe
in the InteractionServer folder of the
Interaction Management CD.
b. Click Next in the Welcome screen.
c.
Select
Interaction Server
in the
Select Application Type
screen.
Click Next .
d. Enter the login details to connect to Configuration Server and click
Next .
e.
Click
Next in the Client Side Port Configuration screen (if you want to use client-side port configuration, refer to the Genesys 8.0 Security
Deployment Guide for more information).
f.
Select the Interaction Server Application that you configured in
from the list and click
Next
.
g. Click Install to install Interaction Server.
h. Click
Finish
when the installation has been completed.
Deployment Guide 45
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Runtime Node Installation
Initialize the
Interaction Server
Databases
11. Navigate to the installation directory for Interaction Server. On Windows, the default installation directory is C:\Program Files\GCTI\eServices
8.0.1\Interaction Server
. Locate the script
folder.
a. In the script folder, locate the folder for your DBMS type.
b. From your database administrative interface, run the isdb_<Database Type>.sq
l script on the Interaction Server database.
c.
Run the eldb_<Database Type>.sql
script on the Event Log database.
End of procedure
iWD Runtime Node Installation
This section describes the procedures that are used to install iWD Runtime
Node. The iWD Runtime Node must be installed on a Java web application server before it can run iWD services. When deploying services for multiple tenants and solutions, each tenant and solution should have its own dedicated runtime node, so that the deployment of services to one runtime node will not affect the other runtime nodes that are running. Multiple runtime nodes can be set up to distribute load by running them on different physical computers. See
“Solutions and Services” on page 136 for more information about Solutions.
You might choose to have multiple Runtime Nodes under a single Solution in order to have a more distributed architecture, or for high availability. If you create additional Runtime Nodes on your application server, with corresponding Runtime Nodes created through iWD Manager, each of these
Runtime Nodes in iWD Manager must map to a separate Runtime Node application in Configuration Server. Each of the Runtime Node Applications in
Configuration Server must have a connection to the Interaction Server
Application configured on its
Connections
tab.
Note:
For information about deploying iWD Services to run on multiple
Runtime Nodes, see “Deploying Services on Multiple Runtime
Procedure:
Installing the iWD Runtime Node
Purpose: To install an instance of the iWD Runtime Node.
46 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Runtime Node Installation
Prerequisites
•
The environment meets the requirements that are described in “Installation
•
The web application server is stopped.
•
The iWD Runtime, Rules, and Manager CD.
Start of procedure
1. Log into Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator and import the iWD Runtime Node
Application
template from the iWD Runtime, Rules, and Manager CD.
2. Create a new
Application
object, based on the template. (Refer to the
Genesys Administrator Help for specific information about creating new applications.)
Note:
The iWD Runtime Node
Application
will show as a Third Party
Server in Configuration Manager and Genesys Administrator.
3. On the
General
tab, enter a name for the iWD Runtime Node.
4. On the
Server Info
tab, enter the
Host
and
Port
that iWD Runtime will use.
5. On the
Start Info
tab, enter any text in the
Working Directory, Command
Line,
and
Command Line Arguments
fields.
Note:
The
Application
object cannot be saved if these fields are left blank, but because the actual values will not be used, you can enter any text.
6. On the Connections tab, add a connection to Interaction Server.
7. Click
OK
to save the
Application
object.
8. Locate and double-click
setup.exe
in the Runtime Node directory
( iwd_node
) of the iWD Runtime, Rules, and Manager CD.
9. The iWD Runtime Node Installation Wizard opens. Click
Next
in the
Welcome screen.
10. Select the web container (for example, Apache Tomcat or WebSphere) and click
Next
.
Deployment Guide 47
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Runtime Node Installation
11. If you selected WebSphere in Step 10
, select the appropriate JDK from the list and click
Next
.
Note:
This is not the JDK which will be used by Websphere. This is necessary to properly configure the scripts which will be used to build the WAR archive.
12. In the
Choose Destination Folder
window, browse to the directory in which you want the iWD Runtime Node Java application part to be installed.
13. If you selected Apache Tomcat in Step 10 , browse to the
Home
directory for your Apache Tomcat installation (for example, C:\Program
Files\Apache\Tomcat60\
). The Runtime Node components will be installed in the selected directory under the webapps
folder.
If you selected WebSphere in Step 10
, browse to the arbitrary directory. iWD Runtime Node Java application part will be installed in that directory.
After installation of iWD Runtime Node and other necessary iWD components you will need to build the WAR archive as described in
14. Click
Next
, then
Install
, then
Finish
.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
If you are using Java 6.0:
When iWD Runtime Node and iWD Manager have been installed, navigate to your web application server’s
\WEB-INF\lib
folder and delete jaxb-api.jar and jaxb-impl.jar. These files should be deleted because their presence may lead to error messages due to compatibility issues between the versions of these
.jar files and Java 6.0.
Note:
Do not delete these files if you are using Java 5.0. Check your
JAVA_HOME
environment variable to verify which version is in use.
•
If you are using the Statistics Adapter service in your environment, you must update the iWD Runtime Node application as described in
Associating a Person’s account with the iWD Runtime Node application .
•
Install iWD Manager as described in “iWD Manager Installation” on page 49 .
48 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Manager Installation
Procedure:
Associating a Person’s account with the iWD Runtime
Node application
Purpose: This procedure is required only if you plan to deploy the Statistics
Adapter service. This service is optional. Refer to “Statistics Adapter” on page 170
for more information about this service. If deployed, the Statistics
Adapter service will need to update the options in your Stat Server application, and it does this through the iWD Runtime Node application that has been configured in Configuration Server. For this reason, you need to ensure that your iWD Runtime Node is configured so that it can make the required changes to the Stat Server application on behalf of a user with appropriate security permissions.
Start of procedure
1. In Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, locate the
Application
for the iWD Runtime Node where you will be running the
Statistics Adapter service.
2. Select the
Security
tab.
3. In the
Log On As
section, select
This Account
and click the browse button.
4. In the Add User dialog box, select a user who is a member of the
Administrators Access Group and who has Full Control permissions for the iWD Runtime Node application.
5. Click
OK
to close the Add User dialog box.
6. Click OK to save and close the application’s properties.
End of procedure
iWD Manager Installation
This section describes the procedures that are used to install iWD Manager. It contains the following topics:
iWD Configuration Database Preparation, page 50
iWD Manager Installation, page 51
Deployment Guide 49
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Manager Installation
iWD Configuration Database Preparation
The iWD Configuration database must be created prior to installation of iWD
Manager.
Note:
The iWD Configuration database is distinct from the Genesys
Configuration database.
Procedure:
Creating the iWD Configuration database
Purpose: The iWD Manager application utilizes a database in which all of the configuration data is stored. This database must be created before the iWD
Manager application can be installed and accessed.
Note:
The following procedure is a general procedure. Please work with your enterprise’s database administrator to follow the specific procedure that is required by your database management system and your enterprise policies.
Start of procedure
1. Ensure that the database server is running.
2. Log on to the database server’s administrative interface (such as Oracle
Enterprise Manager).
3. Create a new database user account (for example, iwdmanageruser ). This account will be used by iWD Manager to access the database.
4. Create a new database (for example, iwdmanagerdb ). This database will be used by iWD Manager to store configuration data.
5. Ensure that the user who was created in Step 3
has full access to the database, including the following permissions
:
• CREATE TABLE
• CREATE INDEX
• CREATE VIEW
• CREATE TRIGGER
• CREATE SEQUENCE
End of procedure
50 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Manager Installation
iWD Manager Installation
The iWD Manager application must be installed on a Java application server before it can be accessed. iWD Manager and iWD Runtime must be installed before any other iWD components can be installed.
Procedure:
Installing iWD Manager
Purpose: To install the iWD Manager application. Installation of iWD
Manager saves the required database scripts in the working directory. These scripts must be run against the iWD Configuration database and the Interaction
Server database. This procedure describes how to install iWD Manager, as well as how to update the databases.
Prerequisites
•
The web application server (such as Tomcat) is stopped.
•
The iWD Configuration database has been created (see Procedure:
Creating the iWD Configuration database, on page 50
).
•
The iWD Configuration database is accessible.
•
The computer on which the iWD Manager is going to be installed has network access to the computer that is hosting Genesys Configuration
Server. Users of iWD Manager will be authenticated through Genesys
Configuration Server.
Start of procedure
1. Log into Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator and import the iWD Manager Application template from the iWD Runtime, Rules and
Manager CD.
2. Create a new Application object based on the template. (Refer to the
Genesys Administrator Help for specific information about creating new applications.) On the
General
tab, enter a name for your iWD Manager application.
Note:
The iWD Manager Application will show as a Third Party
Application in Configuration Manager and Genesys
Administrator.
3. On the
Connections
tab, add a connection to Interaction Server.
4. Click
Save
to save the iWD Manager application.
Deployment Guide 51
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Manager Installation
5. Locate and double-click
setup.exe
in the iWD Manager directory of the iWD Runtime, Rules, and Manager CD.
6. The iWD Manager Installation Wizard opens. Click
Next
in the
Welcome screen.
7. Select the web container (for example, Tomcat or WebSphere) and click
Next
.
8. If you selected WebSphere in Step 7 , select the appropriate JDK from the
list.
Note:
This is not the JDK which will be used by WebSphere. This is necessary to properly configure the scripts which will be used to build the WAR archive.
9. If you selected Apache Tomcat in
, browse to the Home directory for your Apache Tomcat installation. The iWD Manager components will be installed in the selected directory.
10. Click
Next
.
11. In the
Connection Parameters to the Configuration Server
screen, enter the login details to connect to Genesys Configuration Server and then click
Next :
Host name
: The host of Genesys Configuration Server
Port
: The port that is used by Genesys Configuration Server
User name
: The user name of the
Person
(or
User
) as defined in Genesys
Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator.
Password
: The password that is associated with the
Person
(or
User
).
12. Choose the destination location for iWD Manager. If you selected
Websphere in
Step 7 , both supporting files and iWD Manager Java
application part will be installed in that location. After installation of iWD
Manager and other iWD components you will need to build the WAR
archive as described in “Post-Installation Steps When Using WebSphere
Application Server” on page 63 and install using WebSphere Integrated
Solutions Console.
You can accept the default or browse to another location on your computer.
Click Next .
13. Select the database type that will be used by the iWD Configuration
database, which was created in Procedure: Creating the iWD Configuration database, on page 50
.
14. Enter the parameters that are used to connect to the iWD Configuration database in the next screen.
52 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Manager Installation
Enter the following information:
•
DB Server Host
: The name of the computer on which the database is located.
•
Database Name : The name of the iWD Configuration database (as specified in
Procedure: Creating the iWD Configuration database, on page 50 ).
•
User Name
: The name of the user that is used to connect to the database.
•
Password : The password that is used to connect to the database.
Click
Next
15. Enter the host name and port of the computer on which the backup
Genesys Configuration Server is running. If there is no backup
Configuration Server in your environment, specify the primary
Configuration Server host and port. Click
Next
.
16. In the
Ready to Install
screen, click
Install
to begin the installation of iWD Manager.
17. When installation has been completed, click
Finish
.
18. Optional step: Encode your database password. A file named passwordEncoder.cmd
(or passwordEncoder.sh
for UNIX-based operating systems) file is included when you install iWD Manager. This utility can be run to encode the database password that appears in the iwd.properties
file, which is located in
<web application server directory>/webapps/iwd_manager/WEB-INF/classes
(the password is in plain text in the iwd.properties
file by default).
Note:
In order for the password encoder to work, the JDK/JRE bin directory must be added to the
PATH
system environment variable.
For example, if the JDK is installed in c:\Program
Files\Java\jdk1.5.0_21\ then
c:\Program
Files\Java\jdk1.5.0_21\bin\ should be in the
PATH
system environment variable.
a. Open a Windows command-line window (go to
Start->Run
and enter cmd
in the Run dialog box)
.
b. Navigate to the directory in which the passwordEncoder.cmd
file is located (for example, cd C:\Program
Files\GCTI\iWDManager\passwordEncoder where the cd command is used to change the directory).
c.
Enter passwordEncoder <unencoded password> (for example, if the password is genesys
you would type in passwordEncoder genesys
).
d. The command-line window will display the encoded version of the password
Deployment Guide 53
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Manager Installation
e.
In the iwd.properties
file, replace the unencoded version of the password string with the encoded version
( iwd.configDatabase.password=
).
f.
Change the value of the iwd.configDatabase.passwordEncoded
property to true.
g. Save the iwd.properties
file. Below are two sample files. The first shows an iwd.properties file before the password was encoded. The example shows the same file after the password was encoded.
Sample file with unencoded password
iwd.configDatabase.url=jdbc:sqlserver://iwd80vm;databaseName=iwd managerdb iwd.configDatabase.username=genesys iwd.configDatabase.password=genesys iwd.configDatabase.passwordEncoded=false iwd.configDatabase.driverClassName=com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.
SQLServerDriver iwd.configDatabase.hibernateDialect=org.hibernate.dialect.SQLSer
verDialect iwd.configDatabase.type=mssql iwd.cfgServerHost=localhost iwd.cfgServerPort=2020 iwd.cfgServerBackupHost=localhost iwd.cfgServerBackupPort=2020 iwd.host=maestro_01
54 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Manager Installation
Sample file with encoded password
iwd.configDatabase.url=jdbc:sqlserver://iwd80vm;databaseName=iwd managerdb iwd.configDatabase.username=genesys iwd.configDatabase.password=Z2VuZXN5cw== iwd.configDatabase.passwordEncoded=true iwd.configDatabase.driverClassName=com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.
SQLServerDriver iwd.configDatabase.hibernateDialect=org.hibernate.dialect.SQLSer
verDialect iwd.configDatabase.type=mssql iwd.cfgServerHost=localhost iwd.cfgServerPort=2020 iwd.cfgServerBackupHost=localhost iwd.cfgServerBackupPort=2020 iwd.host=maestro_01.
Note:
You can use other Base64 encoders to encode your password as well. These can be found easily on the Web. One example is: http://www.motobit.com/util/base64-decoder-encoder.asp
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
If you are using Java 6.0:
When iWD Runtime Node and iWD Manager have been installed, navigate to your web application server’s
\WEB-INF\lib
folder and delete jaxb-api.jar and jaxb-impl.jar.
These files should be deleted because their presence may lead to error messages due to compatibility issues between the versions of these
.jar files and Java 6.0.
Note:
Do not delete these files if you are using Java 5.
•
Install the remaining iWD components. See
•
Run the iWD Setup Utility. See “iWD Setup Utility” on page 67 .
iWD Configuration Database Upgrade Utility (dbup)
iWD Manager includes a command line database initialization/upgrade utility.
This utility is named dbup.cmd
and is found in the dbup
folder of the iWD
Deployment Guide 55
Chapter 3: Installation Enabling ADDP Connections Between iWD and the Genesys Suite
Manager installation directory. To initialize or upgrade your database in a semi-automated way (fully automated upgrade occurs upon first launch of iWD Manager), make a copy of the dbup.<database type>.properties
file
(found in the dbup
folder), rename it to dbup.properties
and modify it to specify your database connection parameters. Then, in a command prompt, enter the following command: dbup.cmd -d
This utility can also be used to update the iWD Configuration database.
Note:
If you execute dbup.cmd
with no switch (such as
-d
), the console window will display information about the actual database query that will be made to the database, without actually executing the query. It will only execute the query when you type dbup.cmd -d.
This will allow you to review the query before you execute it.
If you enter dbup.cmd
without the
-d
switch, and a SQL query is not displayed, that means that your database is already up to date and there are no SQL queries that should be executed.
iWD Manager Database Auto-Update
iWD Manager can initialize and upgrade its database automatically. This is done by creating the database and configuring iWD Manager to use that database. No manual execution of database scripts is required.
At first launch iWD Manager will connect to the database and will allow the user to perform Create/Upgrade procedure from the login screen.
Enabling ADDP Connections Between iWD and the Genesys Suite
To enable ADDP in connections between various parts of iWD and the rest of
Genesys suite, follow the steps below.
56 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Enabling ADDP Connections Between iWD and the Genesys Suite
Enabling/Disabling ADDP for iWD Manager Application
Procedure:
Enabling/disabling ADDP for the iWD Manager application
Start of procedure
1. After installation, in the iwd.properties
file, configure the following parameters:
• iwd.addpTimeout
• iwd.addpRemoteTimeout.
By default ADDP is enabled and timeouts are set to
10 seconds.
2. To disable ADDP, set timeouts to
0
(zero).
End of procedure
Enabling/Disabling ADDP for iWD Runtime Node
Procedure:
Enabling/disabling ADDP for the iWD Runtime node
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator or Genesys Configuration Manager, open the iWD Runtime Node application.
2. On the
Connections
tab, enable ADDP for the connection to Interaction
Server.
3. Set local and remote timeouts. Genesys recommends 10 seconds as normally sufficient.
4. In iWD Manager, under the solution which is deployed on a particular runtime node, configure the following parameters for Configuration Server
Connector and Interaction Server Connector services:
•
addpTimeout
(seconds)
•
addpRemoteTimeout
(seconds).
Genesys recommends setting the timeouts to the same values as configured in Genesys Administrator or Configuration Manager for the Runtime Node application.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 57
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart
Enabling/Disabling ADDP for BCMS
Procedure:
Enabling/Disabling ADDP for Business Context
Management Services
Start of procedure
1. In Genesys Administrator or Genesys Configuration Manager, open the
BCMS application.
2. On the Connections tab, enable ADDP for the connection to BCMS. No additional configuration is required in the iWD Manager.
End of procedure
Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD
Data Mart
When iWD Runtime Node and iWD Manager have been installed, the remaining iWD components can be installed. It does not matter the order in which you install the following components, but either iWD Runtime Node or iWD Manager must be installed first.
Note:
At this stage in the installation process, you can also install the iWD
WebSphere MQ Capture Adapter. Because the iWD WebSphere MQ
Capture Adapter is a separate sellable product, its installation procedures are located in the iWD 8.0 WebSphere MQ Capture
Adapter Reference Guide.
This section contains the following procedures:
Installing iWD Capture, page 60
Installing iWD Data Mart, page 61
Note:
Each of these components must be installed on the iWD Manager
Host as well as the iWD Runtime Node host. The installation will prompt you to select whether you are installing on the iWD Manager host, the iWD Runtime Node host, or if you are installing to both (in other words, if iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node are on the same host, select both).
58 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart
When these components have been installed, run the iWD Setup Utility. See
“iWD Setup Utility” on page 67
.
Note:
When installing iWD components, stop your Tomcat web application server. Stopping is optional for WebSphere.
Procedure:
Installing iWD Rules
Purpose: To install an instance of iWD Rules for your iWD 8.0 Solution.
Prerequisites
•
iWD Manager and/or iWD Runtime Node are installed.
Start of procedure
1. From the server that is running iWD Manager, navigate to the iWD Rules folder of the iWD Runtime, Rules, and Manager CD. Locate and double-click
Setup.exe
.
2. Click
Next
in the
Welcome
screen.
3. iWD components must be installed on the host that is running iWD
Manager as well as the host that is running iWD Runtime Node. If both are installed on the same host, select iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node.
Otherwise, select only iWD Manager or iWD Runtime Node. Click Next .
4. Select the appropriate iWD Manager instance from the list that is displayed if it is installed on this host, and click Next . If you selected both iWD
Manager and iWD Runtime Node, or only iWD Runtime Node, on the previous screen, you will be prompted to select the appropriate instance of iWD Runtime Node.
5. Choose a destination folder for iWD Rules. Either accept the default location or browse to a different location. Click
Next
.
6. Click
Install
to install iWD Rules. Click
Finish
when the installation has been completed.
7. If iWD Runtime Node is running on a different host, you will need to install iWD Rules on that host as well. Repeat steps
through
the iWD Runtime Node host, selecting iWD Runtime Node when prompted.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 59
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart
Procedure:
Installing iWD Capture
Purpose: To install an instance of iWD Capture for your iWD 8.0 Solution.
Prerequisites
•
iWD Manager and/or iWD Runtime Node are installed.
Start of procedure
1. From the server that is running iWD Manager, navigate to the iWD
Capture folder of the iWD Data Mart, Capture, and Stat Extensions CD.
Locate and double-click
Setup.exe
.
2. Click
Next
in the
Welcome
screen.
3. Choose a destination folder for iWD Capture. Either accept the default location or browse to a different location. Click
Next
.
4. Click
Install
to install iWD Capture. Click
Finish
when the installation has been completed.
5. If iWD Runtime Node is running on a different host, you will need to
install iWD Capture on that host as well. Repeat steps Steps 1
through
from the iWD Runtime Node host, selecting iWD Runtime Node when prompted.
End of procedure
Notes:
1. For information about installing the iWD MQ WebSphere Capture
Adapter, refer to the iWD 8.0 WebSphere MQ Capture Adapter
Reference Guide.
2. Beginning in version 8.0.2, eServices offers integrated JMS
Capture Point functionality. Refer to the eServices documentation for more information. Version 8.0.210 of eServices (specifically, the Interaction Server component) also includes integrated XML
File Capture Point functionality. Version 8.1.0 of eServices (the
Interaction Server component) includes an integrated Database
Capture Point.
60 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart
Procedure:
Installing iWD Data Mart
Purpose: To install an instance of iWD Data Mart for your iWD 8.0 Solution.
Notes:
Each iWD tenant solution requires its own Data Mart.
Genesys recommends putting the iWD Data Mart services on a separate Runtime Node than that which hosts the rest of the iWD services. This is because the iWD Data Mart services are CPU and memory intensive.
Prerequisites
•
iWD Manager and/or iWD Runtime Node are installed.
Start of procedure
1. From the server that is running iWD Manager, navigate to the iWD Data
Mart folder of the iWD Data Mart, Capture, and Stat Extensions CD.
Locate and double-click Setup.exe
.
2. Click
Next
in the
Welcome
screen.
3. Choose a destination folder for iWD Data Mart. Either accept the default location or browse to a different location. Click
Next
.
4. Click
Install
to install iWD Data Mart. Click
Finish
when the installation has been completed.
5. If iWD Runtime Node is running on a different host, you will need to
install iWD Data Mart on that host as well. Repeat steps Steps 1 through 4
from the iWD Runtime Node host, selecting iWD Runtime Node when prompted.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
Create the iWD Data Mart Database. See
.
•
If you will be using the Genesys Interactive Insights for iWD product for historical reporting based on the iWD Data Mart, you must enable several aggregates that are not enabled by default. Please see the “Reading iWD
Aggregation” section of the Interactive Insights 8.0 Deployment Guide.
Deployment Guide 61
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart
Procedure:
Creating the iWD Data Mart Database
Purpose: To create the iWD Data Mart database.
Prerequisites
•
iWD Data Mart is installed. See Procedure: Installing iWD Data Mart, on page 61 .
Note:
The following procedure is a general procedure. Please work with your enterprise’s database administrator to follow the specific procedure that is required by your database management system and your enterprise policies.
Start of procedure
1. Ensure that the database server is running.
2. Log on to the database server’s administrative interface (such as Oracle
Enterprise Manager).
3. Create a new database (for example, iwddatamart
). This database will be used by iWD Data Mart to store data.
4. Ensure that there is a user, who has access to the Data Mart database, who has the following permissions:
• CREATE TABLE
• CREAT INDEX
• CREATE VIEW
•
CREATE TRIGGER
(Oracle)
•
CREATE SEQUENCE
(Oracle)
5. The iWD Data Mart database will be initialized automatically the first time
the Database Service and Kettle ETL Service are started. See “Database
for more information about the Database Service. If the Database Service’s AutoSynchronize option is selected, this initialization is automatic, and the Database Service will also check for updates to the iWD Data Mart database whenever a new version of iWD
Data Mart is installed. The
AutoSynchronize option will also initialize ETL plug-ins.
If your database administrator prefers to prefers to inspect the SQL statements prior and to execute the database initialization and/or upgrade manually, iWD provides a command-line utility for this called dbup_dm.cmd
. See
“iWD Data Mart Database Upgrade Utility (dbup_dm)”
for more information about this utility.
End of procedure
62 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD Rules, iWD Capture, and iWD Data Mart
iWD Data Mart Database Upgrade Utility (dbup_dm)
iWD Data Mart includes a command line database initialization/upgrade utility. This utility is called dbup_dm.cmd
and is found in the dbup
folder of the iWD Data Mart installation directory.
To initialize or upgrade your database, rename the dbup.template.properties
file (found in the dbup
folder) to dbup.properties
and modify it to specify your database connection parameters. Then, in a command prompt, enter the following command: dbup_dm.cmd -d
This utility can also be used to update the iWD Data Mart database.
Notes:
If you execute dbup_dm.cmd
without any switch (such as
-d
), the console window will display information about the actual database query that will be made to the database, without actually executing the query. Only when you type dbup_dm.cmd -d
will it actually execute the query. This will allow you to review the query before you execute it.
If you type dbup_dm.cmd
without the
-d
switch, and you do not see any SQL query displayed, then you know that your database is already up to date and there are no SQL queries that should be executed.
Post-Installation Steps When Using WebSphere Application
Server
After the installation of iWD Manager, iWD Runtime Node and all the components, it is necessary to build the WAR archives and install them into
WebSphere using Integrated Solutions Console.
Procedure:
Building WAR archives for iWD Manager and iWD
Runtime Node
Start of procedure
1. Browse to the directory which was specified during installation of iWD
Manager and continue to subdirectory \webapps.
2. Launch the iWD_Manager.bat
file. This will create the iwd_manager.war
file
3. Browse to the directory which was specified during installation of iWD
Runtime Node and continue to subdirectory
\webapps.
Deployment Guide 63
Chapter 3: Installation Importing iWD Configuration XMLs
4. Launch the iWD_RuntimeNode.bat
file. This will create the iwd_node.war file
5. Log in to Websphere Integrated Solutions Console.
6. Uninstall existing iWD Manager and iWD Node applications, if they are present.
7. Install iWD applications, and select the prepared WAR files when prompted.
8. When installation is completed, adjust the order of classloaders for each installed iWD application. By default, classloader order is
Parent
first, then
Application
. iWD requires the order to be
Application
first, then
Parent
.
9. To change the order of the classloaders, in WebSphere Integrated Solutions
Console, click on
Application
, click
Manage Modules
, click on
Module
(one per application), then change the classloader order to
Application
, then
Parent .
10. Click
Save
.
11. Start the application.
End of procedure
Importing iWD Configuration XMLs
Procedure:
Import default configuration XMLs into iWD Manager
Prerequisites
iWD Manager and iWD Node as well as all required components are installed.
Application servers are started (if running on WebSphere – applications are started).
Start of procedure
1. Open this link in the browser: http://app_server_host:port/iwd_manager /
2. Log in.
3. If iWD Manager configuration database is not initialized using dbup
or provided SQL scripts, perform Create/Upgrade Configuration Database from login screen
4. Log into iWD Manager.
5. In iWD Manager, open
Import/Export
in the
General
section of the
System tenant.
64 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Creating the Tenant and Solution
6. Import the following files:
•
<iWD Manager installation directory>\config\iwd.xml
.
•
If you are going to use XML message transformation:
<iWD Manager installation directory>\config\iwd_transform.xml
Note:
The XML files are saved to the installation directory when iWD application or component is installed.
•
Capture:
<iWD Capture installation directory> \config\iwd_capture.xml.
•
Data Mart:
<iWD Datamart installation directory>\config\iwd_datamart.xml
and
<iWD Datamart installation directory>\config\iwd_reporting.xml.
•
Rules:
<iWD Rules installation directory>\config\iwd_rules.xml.
7. After each import a message appears at the bottom of the screen to indicate whether the import was successful.
End of procedure
Creating the Tenant and Solution
After the IPs are installed, you must create an iWD tenant and iWD solution in iWD Manager to proceed with the configuration of iWD.
Procedure:
Creating an iWD Tenant and iWD Solution in iWD
Manager
Purpose: To create a Tenant and Solution in iWD Manager for your iWD installation.
Note:
It is recommended that you do not create any Solutions and Services under the System Tenant. You should do so under a Managed Tenant.
The recommended role for the System Tenant is to be the place where you create all of your Modules and Components (which is done by importing the various configuration xml files); these Modules can then be inherited by the Managed Tenants and assigned or unassigned as needed at the Managed Tenant level.
Deployment Guide 65
Chapter 3: Installation Creating the Tenant and Solution
Create the iWD
Tenant
Start of procedure
1. Login to iWD Manager:
a. Open a web browser and enter http://<servername>:8080/iwd_manager/ where
<servername>
server is the name of the server on which iWD
Manager is installed and 8080 is the application server port.
b. Log into iWD Manager by using a user name and password of a user that is configured in Genesys Configuration Server. If you are connecting to a Genesys Configuration Server that was recently installed, there will be a default account with
user name = default
and password = password.
For
CME Application Name
, enter the name that you gave your iWD Manager Application
Procedure: Installing iWD Manager, on page 51 .
2. Select
General
from the navigation panel and select the
System
tenant from the
Tenant Selection
3. In the navigation tree, select
New
under
Managed Tenants
.
4. Create a new iWD
Tenant
that will correspond to the Tenant in
Configuration Server. Enter a name and description for the iWD Tenant and select the corresponding Genesys Configuration Server Tenant from the
CME Tenant
in iWD correlate one-to-one with tenants in Configuration Server.
Note:
If you have a single-tenant Genesys Configuration Server, the
CME
Tenant
will be
Resources
. In a multi-tenant configuration, you will have to select the appropriate Tenant from the list.
Create the iWD
Solution
5. Save the new iWD tenant.
6. Select the tenant created in
Tenant Selection drop-down box.
7. Select
Services
from the navigational panel.
8. In the navigation tree, select
New Solution Instance.
9. On the
Solution Instances
screen in iWD Manager, enter a name and
description for the new solution (see “Solution Details” on page 137 for
information about the various properties than can be configured for an iWD Solution). Click
Save
.
Note:
Make note of the Solution ID that is assigned to the newly created solution. This ID will be required when you run the iWD Setup
Utility (the ID will still be visible in iWD Manager as well).
66 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
Create the
Runtime Node
10. The new solution will appear in the navigation tree (if you do not see it, verify your tenant is selected in the tenant drop-down box, and select the
Services
navigation section). Under your solution in the navigation tree, select
Runtime Nodes
.
Note:
Runtime nodes configured here point to the URLs of iWD
Runtime Node java applications, which are containers for the services.
11. On the
Runtime Nodes
panel, click
New
to create a new Runtime Node (see
for information about the various properties that can be configured for a runtime node)
12. Select the Runtime Node Configuration Management Environment application from the list.
Note:
This action links runtime node Java applications to the application objects in the Genesys Configuration Server. Each iWD service running within a container (iWD Runtime Node java application) is authenticated by Configuration Server on behalf of the
Configuration Management Environment application that is selected while configuring the runtime node for the solution.
13. Click
Save
.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
Install and run the iWD Setup Utility. See
•
Create as many iWD solutions as are required for your business needs.
Each iWD solution requires its own dedicated Stat Server. For each iWD solution that you you create, run the iWD Setup Utility and install the Stat
Server Java Extension.
iWD Setup Utility
Installing and running the iWD Setup Utility is the next step in installing iWD
8.0. The iWD Setup utility:
•
Imports business processes. The iWD Setup Utility includes the following business processes:
iWDBP—the default business process, explained in detail in
Appendix B, “iWD Business Process (IWDBP),” on page 251 .
Deployment Guide 67
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
Standard Genesys to IWD adapter—the business process used to insert into iWDBP
to serve Genesys standard open media channels, explained
in Appendix C, “Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard
Genesys Channels,” on page 275 .Creates the Agent Group that is used
in the business process.
ABC IWD Simple BP—the business process used to insert into
existing business processes, explained in Appendix D, “iWD Rules and
Existing Business Processes,” on page 307 .
•
Create an Agent Group called
IWD
in your Genesys Configuration
Database. This is the name of the Agent Group that is used in the example
Distribution routing strategy that is included in the standard iWD Business
Process (
IWDBP
). Although all customers are expected to modify this
Distribution routing strategy for their own needs, having the
IWD
Agent
Group created out of the box will make it easier to use
IWDBP
to process interactions for testing purposes.
•
Creates custom Interaction Server attributes. These attributes are visible in
Configuration Manager under
<tenant name> > Business Attributes >
Interaction Custom Properties.
Note:
You can create additional custom properties to map to any custom attributes used in your tasks. For more information about creating custom properties, refer to the “Interaction Properties” section of the eServices (Multimedia) 8.0 User’s Guide.
•
Creates the capacity rule that includes the media type workitem
and provides the option to assign it to the tenant.
•
Allows you to select and configure the Stat Server to use with iWD Stat
Extensions.
•
Adds the DAP for reporting in Interaction Server.
•
Creates the connector objects for the iWD solution.
Procedure:
Installing the iWD Setup Utility
Purpose: To install the iWD Setup Utility.
Start of procedure
1. On the iWD Runtime, Rules, and Manager CD find and double-click setup.exe
in the iwdSetupUtil folder.
2. Click
Next
in the
Welcome
screen.
3. Browse to the desired destination folder, or accept the default. Click
Next
.
68 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
4. Click
Install
.
5. Click Finish on the Installation Complete screen.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
Use the iWD Setup Utility to prepare your environment for iWD deployment.
Procedure:
Using the iWD Setup Utility
Purpose: To run the iWD Setup Utility to configure the objects required in
Configuration Manager for your iWD installation.
Notes:
The iWD Setup Utility can be run multiple times, as it is possible to have multiple iWD Solutions in your environment. The following procedure outlines the steps taken the first time the utility is run.
Subsequent runs of the utility may result in some screens not being displayed, as the information has already been configured. Therefore, when you run the iWD Setup Utility it might not follow the exact procedure outlined below.
The iWD Setup Utility will not over-write the iWD business process if it has already been imported by a previous run of the iWD Setup
Utility. So, if any customization has been made on the business process, running the iWD Setup Utility will not impact your customization, provided all strategy names are the same.
If you have made changes to the iWD business process, but would like to see the business process that is included in the iWD Setup Utility, you must export the customized business process from IRD, delete it, and then run the iWD Setup Utility again. Or, you can run the iWD
Setup Utility against a different Tenant.
Prerequisites
•
The iWD Setup Utility is installed. See Procedure: Installing the iWD
.
•
iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node have been installed. See
Installing iWD Manager, on page 51 and
•
The iWD Data Mart has been installed and the iWD Data Mart database
has been created. See Procedure: Installing iWD Data Mart, on page 61
and
Procedure: Creating the iWD Data Mart Database, on page 62 .
Deployment Guide 69
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
•
Interaction Server 8.0.1 or later has been installed. If you are not an existing eServices customer, you will need to install an instance of
Interaction Server to use with iWD refer to “Interaction Server Databases” on page 85
.
Start of procedure
1. Start the iWD Setup Utility. Go to
Start > Programs > Genesys Solutions
> iWD > iWD Setup Utility > Start iWD Setup Utility.
2. Enter login details to connect to the Genesys Configuration Server on the
Login
screen (shown in Figure 12 ), and click
OK
.
Figure 12: iWD Setup Utility Login screen
3. The iWD Setup Utility’s Welcome screen is displayed. Click Next .
4. If you are in a multi-tenant environment, you will be prompted to select the
Configuration Server Tenant for which this iWD installation applies.
70 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
5. The
Samples Placement
screen (see Figure 13 ) is displayed. Browse to the
desired destination directory for strategy files and click
Next
.
Figure 13: iWD Setup Utility Samples Placement screen
6. The iWD Setup Utility imports the configuration objects and relocates the strategy files. On the
Import Completed
screen, click
Next
.
7. The
Resource Capacity Rules Selection
screen is displayed (see
). To select the capacity rule, select the check box and click
Next
.
Note:
Selecting this check box will create a capacity rule that can be used immediately, because any new Capture Point services that you create in iWD Manager will have a media type set to workitem by default. You are not required to use workitem
as the media type.
You can create new media types in Configuration Manager or
Genesys Administrator (as Business Attribute objects) and you can use the new media types in any Capture Point services you create, as well as in any capacity rules you configure.
For more information about Business Attributes, refer to the following documents:
• Universal Routing 8.0 Business Process User's Guide
• Universal Routing 8.0 Reference Manual
• eServices (Multimedia) 8.0 User's Guide
Deployment Guide 71
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
Figure 14: iWD Setup Utility Resource Rules Selection screen
Note:
The iWD Setup Utility Resource Rules Selection screen (shown in
) mentions that a capacity rule is required that takes into account the workitem media type. This is not accurate, since iWD may use media types other than workitem
. However, the default capacity rule that will be created by the iWD Setup Utility will be based on the media type workitem
, as described in the Note on page 71
.
72 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
8. On the
Interaction Server Selection
screen (see Figure 15 ), browse to
the Interaction Server you plan to use for this iWD Solution. Click
Next
.
Figure 15: Interaction Server Selection
9. On the
Database Access Point Selection
screen, browse to the Database
Access Point that is configured for the Interaction Server Event Log database, or create a new one if necessary. Click
Next
.
Note:
This screen will not be displayed if the connections were added
previously, as described in Procedure: Installing Interaction Server and its databases, on page 43 .
10. On the
Stat Server Selection
screen, select the Stat Server to be used by iWD Stat Extensions for this solution. Click Next .
Note:
Each iWD Solution requires its own dedicated Stat Server. For more information about installing and configuring Stat Server, refer to the Framework 8.0 Stat Server Deployment Guide.
Deployment Guide 73
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
11. On the iWD Data Mart Database Parameters screen, enter the following information and then click
Next
:
Host
: Enter the host of the iWD Data Mart database server.
Port : Enter the port of the database server (default is 1433 ).
DBMS Type
: Select the DBMS type from the drop-down list.
Database Name
: Enter the name of the iWD Data Mart database (or the SID if using an Oracle database).
Note:
The database name entered here must exactly match the name that was used when the iWD Data Mart database was created. iWD
Stat Extensions reads data from the gtl_stat
table in the iWD
Data Mart database.
User Name : Enter the user name to connect to the database.
Password
: Enter the password to connect to the database.
12. On the Virtual Queue Selection screen, browse to, or create, the Virtual
Queue
object on the Multimedia Switch to use for iWD Stat Extensions reporting. Only one virtual queue is needed for all Stat Server reporting.
Refer to the eServices (Multimedia) 8.0 Deployment Guide and eServices
(Multimedia) 8.0 User’s Guide for more information about Multimedia
Switches. Click
Next
.
13. On the iWD Business Context Management Service Selection
screen (see
), enter the following information to create a new iWD Business
Context Management Service to support Extended Service Protocol (ESP) requests from Interaction Server:
Application Name : Enter a name for the iWD Business Context
Management Service.
Host
: Select the host on which the service will be installed. Specify the host on which iWD Runtime Node is installed.
Port
: Enter the port for the service.
Click
Next
.
This will create a new application in the Genesys Configuration database, which will be used when Interaction Server needs to make requests to the iWD rules engine to evaluate business rules.
Notes:
Each Solution in iWD must have its own Business Context
Management Service.
Refer to
page 221 for information about configuring multiple
Business Context Management Services.
74 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility
Figure 16: iWD Business Context Management Service
14. On the next screen (see
), enter the following information to create an iWD Runtime Node application. If you have manually created the runtime node application(s) in Configuration Manager, you can leave these fields empty and click Next to skip the creation of the runtime node application. This application’s primary function will be to establish a
Deployment Guide 75
Chapter 3: Installation iWD Setup Utility connection to Interaction Server on behalf of an actual iWD Runtime Node running on your application server:
Application Name
: Enter a name for the iWD Runtime Node.
Host : Select the host on which the iWD Runtime Node application will be installed.
Port
: Enter the port for the iWD Runtime Node application.
Click
Next
.
Figure 17: iWD Runtime Node
76 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Installation of iWD Stat Extensions
15. The iWD Solution Selectio n screen is displayed. Enter the Solution ID for the solution that you created in
Procedure: Creating an iWD Tenant and iWD Solution in iWD Manager, on page 65
.
The ESP server field is disabled, but it displays the name of the Business
Context Management Service that you created in
Click
Next
.
Figure 18: iWD Solution Selection
16. Click
Finish
to complete the iWD Setup Utility.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
Install iWD Stat Extensions.
Installation of iWD Stat Extensions
After the iWD Setup Utility has completed, you can install the iWD Stat
Extensions.
Deployment Guide 77
Chapter 3: Installation Installation of iWD Stat Extensions
Procedure:
Installing the iWD Stat Extensions
Purpose: To install the extensions needed to ensure Genesys Stat Server will work with your iWD 8.0 solution.
Prerequisites
•
An instance of Stat Server is installed, dedicated for use with iWD. Refer to the Framework 8.0 Stat Server Deployment Guide for more information.
Start of procedure
1. From the server that is running Stat Server, navigate to the iWD Stat
Extensions folder of the iWD Data Mart, Capture, and Stat Extensions CD.
Locate and double-click
Setup.exe
.
2. Click Next on the Welcome screen.
3. Select the appropriate Stat Server instance from the list that is displayed and click Next .
4. Click
Install
to install iWD Stat Extensions. Click
Finish
when the installation has been completed.
End of procedure
Stat Server Configuration Options
The required Stat Server configuration options will already be configured if you have used the iWD Setup Utility and installed iWD Stat Extensions. Each option is described briefly below.
java-extensions section
During installation, a new option is added to the java-extensions
The option
BPR_iWD_Extension.jar
is added with a value of true
.
java-extensions-bpr-iwd section
The java-extensions-bpr-iwd
section contains options which specify the
JDBC connection driver and parameters for access to the iWD Data Mart database.
The only option whose value shouldn't be changed under normal circumstances is java-extension-jar
. The value of this option is the name of the BPR iWD extension jar-file.
The rest of options are described briefly below:
78 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Link with Genesys Configuration Server
Report Statistics for each
Dimension on its own Virtual Queue
•
jdbc-driver
: The class name for the corresponding JDBC driver. Valid values include:
com.inet.tds.TdsDriver
(for MS SQL)
com.inet.ora.OraDriver
(for Oracle) com.ibm.db2.jcc.DB2Driver
(for IBM DB2) com.mysql.jdbc.Driver
(for MySQL)
•
jdbc-url
: The JDBC URL, which describes RDBMS-specific access parameters. Below are some sample values:
jdbc:inetdae7: hostname:1433?database=databasename
(for MS SQL) jdbc:inetora:hostname:1521:databasename
(for Oracle, if you are using the instance name of the database)
j dbc:inetora:hostname:1521?service=<Service ID>
(for Oracle, if you are using the network service name of the database) jdbc:db2://hostname:50000/databasename
(for IBM DB2) jdbc:mysql://hostname:3306/databasename
(for MySQL)
•
user: The user name for database access.
•
password: The password for database access.
•
verbose
: The level to control debug information, provided in the Stat
Server log file. Possible values are debug
, trace
, or standard
.
•
refresh-interval : The interval (in minutes) for data updates from database.
The iWD Stat Server Java Extension can be configured to report statistics in two different ways: all statistics for all dimensions can be reported on one
Virtual Queue, or each dimension can have its statistics reported on its own
Virtual Queue.
The iWD Setup Utility configures Stat Server to use the iWD Stat Server Java
Extension to report all statistics on one Virtual Queue. If you want to change this, you have to modify the configuration manually.
To report each dimension on its own Virtual Queue:
•
Set the the option “ dimension-mapping-1
to the value
Virtual Queue
.
•
Instead of using the Virtual Queue name as a value for the option virtual-queue-name-1
, indicate the prefix that will be used for Virtual
Queue names. For example, if virtual-queue-name-1=dim, then Virtual
Queues with the names dim-CNT_T2_C106, dim-CNT_T2_C107
and so on, have to be created.
Link with Genesys Configuration Server
The next step in deploying your iWD solution is to link iWD with Genesys
Configuration Server. Some configuration needs to be done in iWD Manager to connect the iWD solution with the Genesys configuration.
Deployment Guide 79
Chapter 3: Installation Link with Genesys Configuration Server
Procedure:
Creating services in iWD Manager
Purpose: To create the Logging Service, Configuration Server Connector,
Interaction Server Connector, Rules, and iWD Business Context Management
Services.
Note:
For a complete list of iWD Services, listed in order of recommended
configuration, refer to “iWD Services” on page 146 . This procedure
only describes a few of the required services. Depending on your business needs, others will be required.
Start of procedure
1. Login to iWD Manager:
a. Open a web browser and enter http://<servername>:port/iwd_manager/
where
<servername>
server is the name of the server on which iWD Manager is installed and port
is the application server port.
b. Log into iWD Manager by using a user name and password of a user configured in Genesys Configuration Server. If you are connecting to a
Genesys Configuration Server that was recently installed, there will be a default account with
user name = default
and password = password.
For
CME Application Name
, enter the name you gave your iWD
Manager
Application
object in
Step 2 of Procedure: Installing iWD
.
2. Select
Services
from the navigation panel and select your tenant from the
Tenant Selection drop-down box.
3. Locate your solution in the navigation tree.
4. Create a Logging Service for the solution.
a. Select
Services > New Service under the solution.
b. Enter a name for the Service, such as LoggingService .
c.
Select
Logging Service
from the
Service Template
drop-down box.
d. Enter a description for the service.
e.
Configure values for the rest of the properties. Refer to “Logging
for information about the properties and possible values.
f.
Click
Save
to save the new service.
5. Create a Configuration Server Connector Service for the solution.
a. Select Services > New Service under the solution.
b. Enter a name for the Service, such as
CfgServerConnector
.
80 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Link with Genesys Configuration Server
c.
Select
Configuration Server Connector
from the
Service Template drop-down box.
d. Enter a description for the service.
e.
Configure values for the rest of the properties. Refer to “Configuration
Server Connector Service” on page 153 for information about the
properties and possible values.
f.
Click
Save
to save the new service.
6. Create an Interaction Server Connector Service.
a. Select
Services > New Service under the solution.
b. Enter a name for the service.
c.
Select
Interaction Server Connector
from the
Service Template drop-down box.
d. Enter a description for the service.
e.
Configure values for the rest of the properties. Refer to “Interaction
Server Connector Service” on page 154 for information about the
properties and possible values.
f.
Click
Save
to save the new service.
7. Create a Rules Service.
a. Select
Services > New Service under the solution.
b. Enter a name for the service.
c.
Select
Rules Service
from the
Service Template
drop-down box.
d. Enter a description for the service.
e.
Configure values for the rest of the properties. Refer to “Rules
for information about the properties and possible values.
f.
Click Save to save the new service.
8. Create a Business Context Management Service.
a. Select
Services > New Service under the solution.
b. Enter a name for the service.
c.
Select
Business Context Management Service
from the
Service
Template
drop-down box.
d. Enter a description for the service.
e.
Configure values for the rest of the properties. Refer to “Business
Context Management Service” on page 168 for information about the
properties and possible values. For the
CMEApplicationName
property, be sure to select the name of the Business Context Management
Service that you created while using the iWD Setup Utility.
Deployment Guide 81
Chapter 3: Installation Logging
f.
Click
Save
to save the new service.
Note:
Refer to
page 221 for information about configuring multiple
Business Context Management Services.
9. Deploy the changes made to your Solution.
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
Create as many iWD Solutions as required for your business needs. If you plan to configure reporting though CCPulse+, each iWD Solution will require its own dedicated Stat Server. For each iWD Solution you create, run the iWD Setup Utility and install the Stat Server Java Extension.
•
Configure logging for iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node. See
.
•
Update the Interaction Server databases. See “Interaction Server
.
Logging
iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node support creation of their own log files for troubleshooting purposes. As well, they both support centralized logging through Genesys Message Server. The parameters needed for both types of logging are configured in the log4j.properties
file for each application. The following procedure explains how to configure the required parameters.
Procedure:
Configuring logging for iWD Manager and iWD
Runtime Node
Purpose: To configure logging for iWD Manager and iWD Runtime Node.
Prerequisites
•
iWD Manager and iWD Runtime are both installed.
•
For centralized logging, Genesys Message Server is installed. Refer to the
Framework 8.0 Management Layer User’s Guide for more information about Message Server.
82 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Logging
Start of procedure
1. Find the log4j.properties
file in the web application server’s (Tomcat or
WebSphere) webapps
directory and open it in a text editor.
Note:
For WebSphere, the application is located under
WAS_root/profiles/<profile>/installedApps/<node,cell>/<appli cation>_war.ear/<application>.war/WEB-INF/classes
Example:
/usr/IBM/WebSphere/AppServer/profiles/AppSrv01/installedApps
/rs6000Node01Cell/iwd_manager_war.ear/iwd_manager.war/WEB-IN
F/classes
2. The exact path is webapps\iwd_node\WEB-INF\classes\log4j.properties
for iWD Runtime Node and webapps\iwd_manager\WEB-INF\classes\log4j.properties
for iWD
Manager.
Note:
Be sure to remove the comment symbol ( # ) when you update the parameters.
3. For centralized logging, update the very first row of the log4j.properties
file to include centralized_node
at the end: log4j.rootLogger=INFO, runtime, centralized_node
4. For centralized logging, update the following parameters with the Message
Server host and Message Server port, respectively: log4j.appender.centralized_manager.MessageServerHost=[ToBeChange d:MSG_SRV_HOST] log4j.appender.centralized_manager.MessageServerPort=[ToBeChange d:MSG_SRV_PORT]
5. Update the following line to include the name of your iWD Manager or iWD Runtime application (this is the application name that you must use to set up alarms in Solution Control Server): log4j.appender.centralized_node.MessageServerClientName=iWD
Runtime Node
6. Configure the parameter to specify the level of logging to send to Message
Server: log4j.appender.centralized_node.Threshold=INFO
Threshold
can be set to any of the following values:
TRACE
DEBUG
INFO
Deployment Guide 83
Chapter 3: Installation Logging
WARN
ERROR
.
7. For information about various settings for the root logger, refer to log4j framework docs, such as http://logging.apache.org/log4j/1.2/manual.html.
8. You can change the directory where the logs will be written by changing the value of this line: log4j.appender.runtime.File=C:/GCTI/iWD/iwd_runtime.log
Note:
It is strongly recommended that you only set the file path to a directory on a local machine, not a remote location such as a shared network drive.
Logging to a remote location can severely impact performance
9. You can change the logging level by changing this line (sample is from an iWD Runtime
log4j.properties
file): log4j.appender.runtime.Threshold=INFO
Possible values are
Off, Warning, Error, Debug, Info,
and
Trace
. See
“Service Log Levels” on page 152
for a description of each log level.
10. You can change the maximum file size of the logs by changing this line: log4j.appender.runtime.MaxFileSize=256MB
11. Save your changes.
The following is a sample iWD Runtime log4j.properties
file configured for logging:
# info, rolling 256MB each (2 GB max) log4j.rootLogger=INFO, runtime, centralized_node log4j.category.org.apache.myfaces.renderkit.html.util=ERROR log4j.category.org.hibernate.util.JDBCExceptionReporter=FATAL log4j.category.org.hibernate.event.def.AbstractFlushingEventList
ener=FATAL log4j.category.org.apache.commons.httpclient=ERROR log4j.category.org.apache.commons.digester=ERROR log4j.category.org.codehaus.xfire.transport.http.HttpChannel=FAT
AL log4j.category.org.codehaus.xfire.handler.DefaultFaultHandler=ER
ROR log4j.appender.runtime=org.apache.log4j.RollingFileAppender
log4j.appender.runtime.Threshold=INFO log4j.appender.runtime.File=C:/GCTI/iWD/iwd_runtime.log
log4j.appender.runtime.layout=org.apache.log4j.PatternLayout
84 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Interaction Server Databases log4j.appender.runtime.layout.ConversionPattern=%d{yyyy-MM-dd
HH:mm:ss}|%t|%p|%c|%m%n log4j.appender.runtime.MaxBackupIndex=7 log4j.appender.runtime.MaxFileSize=256MB
# if you enable centralized_node appender then make sure you change rootLogger to:
# log4j.rootLogger=INFO, runtime, centralized_node log4j.appender.centralized_node=com.genesyslab.iwd.log.Centraliz
edAppender log4j.appender.centralized_node.Threshold=INFO log4j.appender.centralized_node.layout=org.apache.log4j.PatternL
ayout log4j.appender.centralized_node.layout.ConversionPattern=%m log4j.appender.centralized_manager.MessageServerHost=MsgSrvrHost log4j.appender.centralized_manager.MessageServerPort=4050 log4j.appender.centralized_node.MessageServerClientName=iWD
Runtime Node
End of procedure
Interaction Server Databases
Once all iWD components have been installed, database update scripts have to be run on the Interaction Server databases and options need to be imported into your Event Log DAP.
Procedure:
Updating the Interaction Server databases
Purpose: To run the update scripts on the Interaction Server databases for compatibility with iWD 8.0, import configuration options for the Event Log
DAP, and configure the completed-queues
option for Interaction Server.
Prerequisites
•
Interaction Server is installed as described in Procedure: Installing
Interaction Server and its databases, on page 43
(also refer to the eServices
(Multimedia) 8.0 Deployment Guide).
Deployment Guide 85
Chapter 3: Installation Interaction Server Databases
•
The installation of iWD components as outlined in this chapter is completed up to this point. In particular, iWD Manager must be installed.
During iWD Manager installation, the database scripts that are required to update the Interaction Server databases are saved to the iWD Manager installation directory.
Note:
The procedure below is a general procedure. Please work with your enterprise’s database administrator to follow the specific procedure required by your database management system and your enterprise policies.
Start of procedure
1. Locate the eventlog_update.sql
script in the
<iWD Manager directory>/sql_scripts/<Database Type> directory and run it on the
Interaction Server Event Log database.
2. Locate the iwd_custom_fields.sql
script in the <iWD Manager directory>/sql_scripts/<Database Type> directory and run it on the
Interaction Server database.
3. In Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, open the properties for your Interaction Server
Application
. In the settings
section, locate the completed-queues
option. This option specifies a list of queues for completed interactions. The completed_at
timestamp in the Interaction
Server database is set for an interaction when it is placed in one of these queues. Add iWD_Completed
as a value. This is the name of the queue used for completed iWD interactions (the name of this queue is not configurable.
iWD_Completed
must be used). Save the changes.
4. In Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, open the properties for your Event Logger DAP Application . On the Properties tab, import evenlog_options.cfg
to update the DAP’s properties. The evenlog_options.cfg
file can be found in the config
directory after iWD
Manager is installed.
End of procedure
Next Steps
Now you should start configuring the mandatory and optional services for your
Solution. Jump ahead to “iWD Services” on page 146 for information about
the available services, their recommended order of configuration, and the properties that can be configured for each service. If you would like to review how to work with iWD Manager first, start at the beginning of
.
86 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems
Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating
Systems
The following iWD 8.0 Installation Packages (IPs) are supported on UNIX operating systems.
•
iWD Manager
•
iWD Runtime Node
•
iWD Rules
•
iWD Capture
•
iWD Data Mart
•
iWD Stat Extensions
•
iWD WebSphere MQ Capture Adapter (optional)
Note:
The iWD Setup Utility cannot be deployed on UNIX platforms; it can only be deployed on Windows hosts.
For the supported UNIX flavors and versions, please consult the Genesys
Supported Operating Environment Reference Manual.
Configuring and installing iWD 8.0 on UNIX hosts follows the general procedure outlined earlier in this chapter.
Below are examples of what it might look like when you run the setup for each
IP manually on a UNIX host. In these examples, the installation is being done on a Solaris host, and the iWD 8.0 version being installed is 8.0.001.04. You might have a slightly different experience if you are installing on a different
UNIX host, or are installing a different version of iWD 8.0.
Note:
If you are using Tomcat, please take into account the following:
• If the
CATALINA_HOME
environment variable is defined, installation will not ask where to install the Java application parts of the iWD applications and components; these will be installed to
$CATALINA_HOME/webapps/<iwd_manager,iwd_node/
• If this is not a desired behavior, please temporarily remove the
CATALINA_HOME
environment variable while installing iWD.
iWD Manager IP
Sun Microsystems Inc. SunOS 5.10 Generic January 2005 bash-3.00# id uid=0(root) gid=0(root) bash-3.00# locale
LANG=en_US.UTF-8
Deployment Guide 87
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems
LC_CTYPE=”en_US.UTF-8”
LC_NUMERIC=”en_US.UTF-8”
LC_TIME=”en_US.UTF-8”
LC_COLLATE=”en_US.UTF-8”
LC_MONETARY=”en_US.UTF-8”
LC_MESSAGES=”en_US.UTF-8”
LC_ALL= bash-3.00# java -version java version “1.5.0_20”
Java (TM) 2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition (build
1.5.0_20-b02)
Java HotSpot(TM) Server VM (build 1.5.0_20-b02, mixed mode) bash-3.00# echo $JAVA_HOME
/usr/jdk/instances/jdk1.5.0/jre bash-3.00# echo $PATH
/usr/jdk/instances/jdk1.5.0/jre:/usr/bin bash-3.00# ls iwdCapAdaptMQS iwdDataMart iwdRules iwdSetupUtil iwdCapture iwdManager iwdRuntimeNode iwdStatExt bash-3.00# cd iwdManager bash-3.00# ls
8000104 bash-3.00# cd 8* bash-3.00# ls ip bash-3.00# cd ip bash-3.00# ls data.tar.gz install.sh read_me.html
genesys_silent.ini ip_description.xml tar gunzip iscript.tar.gz tar_gunzip_license.txt
installer.tar.gz ospatchlist.txt
bash-3.00# ./install.sh
**************************************************
* Welcome to the Genesys 8.0 Installation Script *
**************************************************
Installing iWD Manager, version 8.0.001.04
Please select your servlet container type by number:
1. Tomcat
2. WebSphere
=>1
Please enter the full path to your
Tomcat installation =>/var/apache/tomcat55
Please specify the type of used Database Server:
1) MS SQL Server
2) MySQL Server
3) Oracle Server
88 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems
=>1
Please enter the Database Server hostname or IP address
=>135.225.54.208
Please enter the Database name =>iwdmanagerdb
Please enter the Database Server user name =>iwdmanageruser
Please specify the Database Server user password =>
Please enter the Configuration Server Host Name =>135.225.54.208
Please enter the Configuration Server Port =>2020
Please enter the Configuration Server Backup Host Name
=>135.225.54.208
Please enter the Configuration Server Backup Port =>2020
Please enter full path of the destination directory for installation
=>/tmp/iwd/iwdManager8000104
Extracting tarfile: data.tar.gz to directory:
/tmp/iwd/iwdManager8000104 acme/ acme/readme.txt
acme/web/ acme/web/confirmOrderForm.php
.........
.....
webapp/help/task_management.htm
webapp/help/Hide.gif
webapp/META-INF/ webapp/META-INF/MANIFEST.MF
Installation of iWD Manager, version 8.0.001.04 has completed successfully bash-3.00#
iWD Runtime Node IP
bash-3.00# pwd
/tmp/iWD_IP/iwdRuntimeNode/8000104/ip bash-3.00# bash-3.00# ls data.tar.gz installer.tar.gz iscript.tar.gz tar
Deployment Guide 89
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems genesys_silent.ini install.sh ospatchlist.txt tar_gunzip_license.txt
gunzip ip_description.xml read_me.html
bash-3.00# ./install.sh
**************************************************
* Welcome to the Genesys 8.0 Installation Script *
**************************************************
Installing iWD Runtime Node, version 8.0.001.04
Please select your servlet container type by number:
1. Tomcat
2. WebSphere
=>1
Please enter the full path to your
Tomcat installation =>/var/apache/tomcat55
Please enter full path of the destination directory for installation
=>/tmp/iwd/iwdRuntimeNode8000104
Extracting tarfile: data.tar.gz to directory:
/tmp/iwd/iwdRuntimeNode8000104
.........
......
webapp/ui/lib/codepress/license.txt
webapp/ui/lib/codepress/codepress.html
webapp/ui/lib/codepress/index.html
webapp/ui/lib/codepress/codepress.js
webapp/ui/lib/codepress/images/ webapp/ui/lib/codepress/images/line-numbers.png
Installation of iWD Runtime Node, version 8.0.001.04 has completed successfully.
bash-3.00#
iWD Rules IP
bash-3.00# pwd
/tmp/iWD_IP/iwdRules/8000104/ip bash-3.00# ls data.tar.gz installer.tar.gz iscript.tar.gz tar genesys_silent.ini install.sh ospatchlist.txt tar_gunzip_license.txt
gunzip ip_description.xml read_me.html
bash-3.00# ./install.sh
90 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems
**************************************************
* Welcome to the Genesys 8.0 Installation Script *
**************************************************
Installing iWD Rules, version 8.0.001.04
Please select your servlet container type by number:
1. Tomcat
2. WebSphere
=>1
Please enter the full path to your
Tomcat installation =>/var/apache/tomcat55
Please enter full path of the destination directory for installation
=>/tmp/iwd/iwdRules8000104
Extracting tarfile: data.tar.gz to directory:
/tmp/iwd/iwdRules8000104 config/ config/iwd_rules.xml
iwd_rules.jar
lib/ lib/janino.jar
lib/drools-compiler.jar
lib/commons-jci-core.jar
lib/commons-jci-janino.jar
lib/drools-core.jar
lib/stringtemplate.jar
Installation of iWD Rules, version 8.0.001.04 has completed successfully.
bash-3.00#
iWD Capture IP
bash-3.00# pwd
/tmp/iWD_IP/iwdCapture/8000104/ip bash-3.00# ls data.tar.gz installer.tar.gz iscript.tar.gz tar genesys_silent.ini install.sh ospatchlist.txt tar_gunzip_license.txt
gunzip ip_description.xml read_me.html
bash-3.00# ./install.sh
**************************************************
* Welcome to the Genesys 8.0 Installation Script *
**************************************************
Deployment Guide 91
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems
Installing iWD Capture, version 8.0.001.04
Please select your servlet container type by number:
1. Tomcat
2. WebSphere
=>1
Please enter the full path to your
Tomcat installation =>/var/apache/tomcat55
Please enter full path of the destination directory for installation
=>/tmp/iwd/iwdCapture8000104
Extracting tarfile: data.tar.gz to directory:
/tmp/iwd/iwdCapture8000104 config/ config/iwd_capture.xml
iwd_capture.jar
Installation of iWD Capture, version 8.0.001.04 has completed successfully.
bash-3.00#
iWD Data Mart IP
bash-3.00# pwd
/tmp/iWD_IP/iwdDataMart/8000104/ip bash-3.00# ls data.tar.gz installer.tar.gz iscript.tar.gz tar genesys_silent.ini install.sh ospatchlist.txt tar_gunzip_license.txt
gunzip ip_description.xml read_me.html
bash-3.00# ./install.sh
**************************************************
* Welcome to the Genesys 8.0 Installation Script *
**************************************************
Installing iWD Data Mart, version 8.0.001.04
Please select your servlet container type by number:
1. Tomcat
2. WebSphere
=>1
Please enter the full path to your
Tomcat installation =>/var/apache/tomcat55
92 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Installing iWD on UNIX-Based Operating Systems
Please enter full path of the destination directory for installation
=>/tmp/iwd/iwdDataMart8000104
Extracting tarfile: data.tar.gz to directory:
/tmp/iwd/iwdDataMart8000104 config/ config/iwd_datamart.xml
config/iwd_reporting.xml
dbup/ dbup/iwd_common.jar
dbup/dbup.template.properties
dbup/dbup.oracle.properties
dbup/iwd_dm.jar
dbup/iwd_db_migrate.jar
dbup/readme.txt
dbup/dbup_dm dbup/sqljdbc.jar
dbup/dbup.mssql.properties
dbup/dbup.mysql.properties
etl/ etl/kettle_mysql.properties
etl/aggregate_stats.kjb
etl/aggregate_intraday.kjb
.......
.....
etl/plugins/classif/aggregate_historical_aggregate.ktr
iwd_dm.jar
lib/ lib/edtftpj.jar
lib/javadbf.jar
lib/jug.jar
lib/iwd_common.jar
lib/libformula.jar
lib/CacheDB.jar
lib/sqljdbc.jar
lib/kettle.jar
lib/jsch.jar
lib/jackcess.jar
sql_scripts/ sql_scripts/mysql/ sql_scripts/mysql/iwd_dm_mysql.sql
sql_scripts/oracle/ sql_scripts/oracle/iwd_dm_oracle.sql
sql_scripts/mssql/ sql_scripts/mssql/iwd_dm_mssql.sql
Installation of iWD Data Mart, version 8.0.001.04 has completed successfully.
bash-3.00#
Deployment Guide 93
Chapter 3: Installation Sample Application
iWD Stat Extensions IP
bash-3.00# pwd
/tmp/iWD_IP/iwdStatExt/8000009/ip bash-3.00# ls data.tar.gz installer.tar.gz iscript.tar.gz tar genesys_silent.ini install.sh ospatchlist.txt tar_gunzip_license.txt
gunzip ip_description.xml read_me.html
bash-3.00# ./install.sh
**************************************************
* Welcome to the Genesys 8.0 Installation Script *
**************************************************
Installing iWD Stat Extensions, version 8.0.000.09
Please enter full path of the destination directory for installation
=>/tmp/iwd/iwdStatExt8000009
Extracting tarfile: data.tar.gz to directory:
/tmp/iwd/iwdStatExt8000009 java/ java/ext/ java/ext/BPR_iWD_Extension.jar
java/lib/ java/lib/sqlj.zip
java/lib/mysql-connector-java-3.0.17-ga-bin.jar
java/lib/bprDbServices.jar
java/lib/db2jcc.jar
java/lib/Opta2000.jar
java/lib/Seropto.jar
Installation of iWD Stat Extensions, version 8.0.000.09 has completed successfully.
bash-3.00#
Sample Application
iWD 8.0 includes a sample application (ACME) that can be used to experiment with iWD. The sample application is included on the iWD Manager CD. When iWD Manager is installed, a subfolder called acme is created in the iWD
Manager installation directory. A
readme.txt
file is saved to this folder and contains information about the ACME sample application.
Note:
The ACME sample application requires MySQL.
94 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 3: Installation Sample Application
More information about how to set up and use the ACME sample can be found at the following location: https://sites.google.com/a/iwdlab.com/iwd8/general/acme-sample-appl ication
Deployment Guide 95
Chapter 3: Installation Sample Application
96 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter
4
Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure various objects used in intelligent
Workload Distribution. This chapter contains the following sections:
General Configuration, page 111
Modules and Components, page 125
Solutions and Services, page 136
Departments and Processes, page 182
iWD Manager Overview
iWD Manager is a thin-client web application for configuring and managing intelligent Workload Distribution. It can be accessed via a web browser. For a complete list of supported web browsers, refer to the Genesys Supported
Operating Environment Reference Manual. The application URL is
installation-specific (see “iWD Manager Installation” on page 49
of
). The following is an example of a typical iWD Manager URL: http://<host>:<port>/iwd_manager/
Note:
Browser cookies must be enabled for the iWD Manager application to function correctly.
General Conditions for Configuring an iWD Manager User
•
To access the Global Task List, the
Person
or
User
must be associated with a Place in Genesys Configuration. If the Person or User is not an Agent , the
Place
can be configured as an option on the
Annex
tab of the
Deployment Guide 97
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
Person/User
object. Create a section iWD
(if it does not already exist) and within the iWD
section, create an option iWDManagerPlace
with the value of a valid
Place
name.
•
If you want a user to have access to a specific managed tenant in iWD, that user must have at least
Read
access to the Configuration Server tenant that is linked to that iWD managed tenant—either directly or by being a member of an Access Group that does.
•
The user must have at least Read & Execute permissions to the iWD
Manager application in Configuration Server, and
Read
permissions to the
Configuration Server Host object where the Interaction Server is running, either directly or by being a member of an Access Group that does.
•
If the user is going to have access to the Global Task List, then the user must have at least
Read
permissions to these application objects in
Configuration Server:
Interaction Server
The Database Access Point for the Interaction Server database
The Database Access Point for the Interaction Server Event Log database.
These permissions may be applied directly to the user, or by the user being a member of an Access Group that has such permissions.
•
The
Place
that must be associated with the user must be a
Place
configured under the Configuration Server tenant that maps to the iWD managed tenant. (This presumes that the Interaction Server application also has an association with this Configuration Server tenant.)
•
The
Place
is only used to give the user access to the Global Task List. If the user only needs to log into iWD Manager to perform other functions but does not need access to the Global Task List, they need not have a
Place
configured.
•
If you want to restrict what the user can do in iWD Manager, you must configure a Security Role in iWD Manager that maps to an Access Group to which the user belongs.
•
The user should not have any access to the Environment in Configuration
Server unless they are an Administrative user who should have full permissions to iWD Manager. If you provide even
Read
access to the
Environment, it will override any security policy you have configured for them in iWD Manager.
•
If the user is created under a Configuration Server child tenant, then the following additional conditions must be met:
If you want the user to have access to both the iWD
SYSTEM
tenant as well as the iWD managed tenant to which the Configuration Server tenant maps, then this user must be a member of at least two Access
Groups: one under the
Environment
tenant and one under the child tenant. In both cases, these Access Groups must have at least
Read
98 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
permission to the tenants. If neither of these Access Groups maps to a
Security Role in iWD Manager, then the user will have full access to the iWD Manager GUI.
If you do not want the user to have access to the SYSTEM tenant in iWD
Manager, but only to an iWD managed tenant, then they must belong to an Access Group under the Configuration Server child tenant that maps to a Security Role in iWD Manager. In this case, they would not need to belong to any Access Group under the Environment tenant.
•
If the user is created under the
Environment
tenant—for example, such as the default user that is in the Configuration Server database when it is initially deployed—then in order for this user to have full control of the
Global Task List (not just read-only access), two conditions must be met:
The user must have a valid
Place
configured, where the
Place
is created under a child Configuration Server tenant to which the
Interaction Server is associated.
The user must have an Employee ID that also belongs to a user who is created under a child Configuration Server tenant to which the
Interaction Server is associated.
Examples
Example 1a
The following examples describe how this configuration would work in practice.
•
You have a child tenant in Configuration Server called
ACME
. In iWD
Manager that tenant maps to an iWD Managed tenant called
IWD_ACME
.
•
Under the
ACME
tenant, you have several Places configured: one for each user you want to log into iWD Manager and view the Global Task List.
One of these Places is called iwd_place3
.
•
Under the
ACME
tenant, you have a user with
User Name = system
and
Employee ID = system . The user is a non-agent. On the Annex tab of the user object, you have configured the necessary section called iWD
with the option name set to value iWDManagerPlace
and the value set to iwd_place3
.
•
This user belongs to an Access Group under the
ACME
tenant, called iWDAdministrators
. He does not belong to any other Access Groups under the ACME tenant or the Environment tenant.
•
The iWDAdministrators Access Group has
Read & Execute
permissions to the iWD Manager
Application
object in Configuration Server.
•
The iWDAdministrators Access Group has Read permissions to the ACME tenant.
•
The iWDAdministrators Access Group maps to a security role in iWD
Manager that gives the system user the necessary permissions for the iWD
Manager GUI.
Deployment Guide 99
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
Example 1b
Example 2a
Example 2b
•
Result: The system user can log into iWD Manager and access the
IWD_ACME
managed tenant. He cannot access the
SYSTEM
tenant.
•
The system user described in Example 1a also belongs to the
Administrators Access Group under the
Environment
tenant in
Configuration Server. This Access Group has at least
Read
access to the
Environment tenant.
•
In this case, the user can log into iWD Manager and access both the
SYSTEM tenant and the
IWD_ACME
managed tenant.
•
You remove the user from the iWDAdministrators Access Group and instead make him a member of the Administrators Access Group under the
ACME
tenant in Configuration Server. The Administrators Access Group under the
ACME
tenant has
Read
access to the
ACME
tenant and
Read & Execute permissions to the iWD Manager application object in Configuration
Server.
•
Now, because the user belongs to two Access Groups that give them
Read access to both the
Environment
tenant and
ACME
tenant, they can log into iWD Manager and access both the
SYSTEM
tenant and the
IWD_ACME
managed tenant. They need not belong to an Access Group that maps to an existing security role in iWD Manager.
•
Because they have
Read
permission to the
Environment
tenant in
Configuration Server, this overrides any security policy that is configured for them in iWD Manager.
•
You have a user configured under the
Environment
tenant. In this case, it is the default user who is set up when you first deployed Configuration
Server. Their
User Name
is set to default
and his
Employee ID
is set to default.
•
You have an unused
Place
configured under the
ACME
tenant called iwd_place4.
•
On the
Annex
tab of the user object, you have configured the necessary section called iWD with the option name = iWDManagerPlace
and the value
= iwd_place4
•
The user belongs to an Access Group that has at least
Read
permissions to the
Environment
tenant. He does not belong to any Access Groups under the
ACME
tenant.
•
Result: The default user can log into iWD Manager and have full access to the application, except the Global Task List. He can access the Global Task
List in a read-only mode.
•
You want the default user to also have full access to iWD Manager, including the ability to not only view tasks in the Global Task List under the
IWD_ACME
managed tenant, but also to manage the tasks through the
Global Task List (
Cancel, Hold/Resume, Modify
)
100 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
•
You change his
Employee ID
to an
Employee ID
of a user who is configured under the
ACME
tenant, such as the
Employee ID
of the user system configured in Example 1.
Note:
This Employee ID cannot be shared by two users who will need to access the Global Task List simultaneously. This is because iWD
Manager will be accessing Interaction Server on behalf of this user’s
Employee ID
.
iWD Manager Login
Before accessing iWD Manager functionality, you have to log into the application. The credentials that are entered are authenticated against Genesys
Configuration Server. Therefore, anyone who will need access to iWD
Manager will need to be configured as a
Person
in Genesys Configuration
Manager (also known as a
User
in Genesys Administrator).
Note:
In order for iWD users to have access to the Genesys Configuration
Server objects (for example, to access a list of skills from within a rule action), they must have permission to access the specific objects individually, or at the folder level (or example, access to the entire
Skills
folder in Configuration Server). For users to be allowed to access those objects, they must be members of some Access Group that has at least
Read
permission to those objects. This could be, but but this does not necessarily need to be, the
Users Access Group
.
Alternatively, users may be added to the
Security
tab of these objects directly, rather than inheriting permission by virtue of the Access
Group(s) of which they are a member.
The login screen (see
) prompts for the following information:
•
Username—the username for the
Person
or
User
as configured in Genesys
Configuration Server.
•
Password—the password for the
Person
or
User
as configured in Genesys
Configuration Server.
•
CME Application—the name of the iWD Manager Application object, as configured in Genesys Configuration Server.
•
Config Server Host—the name of the host on which Genesys
Configuration Server is running.
•
Config Server Port—the port Genesys Configuration Server is using.
Deployment Guide 101
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
102
Figure 19: iWD Manager Login Screen
Logging into iWD Manager Programmatically
You can log into iWD Manager programmatically by providing the URL for iWD Manager login page along with a valid username and password. This can facilitate a single sign-on process.
The URL format to use is: http://<appserverhost>:<appserverport>/<iwdmanagerapplication>/ui/login
.jsf?username=<username>&password=<password>&application=<CMEApplicatio n>&passwordEncoded
Where:
•
<appserverhost>
and
<appserverport>
are the host and port for the application server where iWD Manager is deployed.
•
<iwdmanagerapplication>
is the iWD Manager application running on the application server (for example, iwd_manager ).
•
<username>
and
<password>
are a valid username and password combination for the user logging into iWD Manager.
intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
•
<CMEApplication> is the name of the iWD Manager application as configured in the Genesys Configuration database. You can find the name in Genesys Administrator or Configuration Manager. iWD Manager will be shown with an application type of Third Party Application.
Note:
If you want include the
&passwordEncoded
at the end of the URL, then the value for
<password>
should be encoded using BASE64 algorithm.
Otherwise, you can pass a plain-text password in the
<password> parameter and omit
&passwordEncoded
.
An example URL is: http://myTomcatHost:8080/iwd_manager/ui/login.jsf?username=jsmi th&password=myPassword
iWD Manager User Interface
The iWD Manager user interface, shown in
Figure 20 , is composed of three
main application areas:
•
Header bar (see page 104 ). Located on top, it shows general information
and actions, such as logged-in user name and logout action.
•
Navigational panel (see
). Located on the left-hand side, it provides navigation among the various configuration/management objects accessible in iWD Manager.
•
Details view (see
). The largest area that is on the screen, it is where all of the details about an item that is selected in the tree can be viewed and modified.
Figure 20: iWD Manager User Interface
Deployment Guide 103
Chapter 4: Configuration
Header Bar
iWD Manager Overview
The iWD Manager Header bar (see Figure 21 ) provides access to the following
information and actions (left to right):
•
Application logo.
•
Undeployed-changes notification: This is shown only when there are changes in the current tenant's configuration that have not been deployed to runtime; such changes are not active. The notification also includes direct links to a deployment screen for each affected solution.
•
Help: Opens the iWD Manager Help.
•
User: Displays the first and last name of the currently logged-in user.
•
Logout: Logs the user out of the iWD Manager application.
Figure 21: iWD Manager Header Bar
Navigation Panel
The iWD Manager Navigation panel (see
) consists of the following
UI objects:
•
Tenant selection: On top of the navigation area; allows switching among
iWD tenants. See “Tenant Selection” on page 105
.
•
Configuration sections: At bottom of the navigation area; allows switching
among top-level configuration sections. See “Configuration Sections” on page 106
.
•
Navigation tree: In the middle, provides access to configuration objects for the selected tenant. The objects shown depend on which navigation section
is selected. See “Navigation Tree” on page 107 .
•
Last Viewed: Between the navigation tree and its sections, provides quick
access to the last-viewed panes. See “Last Viewed” on page 107
.
104 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
The Navigation area can be temporarily hidden by clicking the hide (<<) icon on the top-right corner; a hidden area can be made visible again by clicking the show (>>) icon.
Deployment Guide
Figure 22: Navigation Panel
Tenant Selection
iWD configuration supports multi-tenancy, in which each iWD Manager user can have access to one or more tenants, depending on their security role and user access permissions. If more than one tenant is accessible to the logged-in
user, tenant selection allows switching among them. See Figure 23 .
Figure 23: Tenant Selection
All configurations shown in different configuration sections are specific to the selected tenant.
Note:
Each tenant in iWD configuration must be directly associated with a tenant in Genesys Configuration Server.
105
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
Configuration Sections
iWD Manager provides the following configuration sections (see Figure 24 ):
•
General: General tenant configuration and actions, such as security policy
and configuration import/export. For a detailed description, see “iWD
Manager Overview” on page 97 .
•
Modules & Components: Modules and components that are owned by or
accessible to the tenant. For a detailed description, see “Modules and
•
Services: Solutions and services that are configured for a tenant. For a
detailed description, see “Solutions and Services” on page 136 .
•
Departments & Processes: iWD business configuration, such as departments, processes, and rules. For a detailed description, see
“Departments and Processes” on page 182
.
•
Global Task List: iWD management views. For a detailed description, see
Chapter 5, “iWD Manager and Task Management,” on page 207
.
106
Figure 24: Configuration Sections
Depending on the application permissions of a logged-in user, only some of these sections might be visible. By default, upon logging in to iWD Manager, the General section is selected. To switch to another section, click on it in the navigation panel. The selected section is also displayed on the top of the navigation panel (just above the tenant selection).
Navigation can also be switched to an alternative, compact mode by clicking the collapse icon (on top). In compact mode, each navigation section will be represented by an icon. See
Figure 25: Compact Configuration Sections
To restore normal navigation mode again, click the expand icon (on top).
intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
Navigation Tree
The navigation tree, shown in Figure 26 , displays iWD configuration and
management objects for the selected tenant and navigation section in a tree structure. Each selectable object is underlined and can be selected by clicking it. When it is selected, the object is marked in bold, and the corresponding details are displayed in the iWD Manager Details area.
For those objects that support creation of new instances, a “New...” action also is present in the tree (such as “New Department...” in the example below). When a “New...” action is selected, details for the new object instance can be entered and saved in the iWD Manager Details area.
Figure 26: Navigation Tree
Last Viewed
By default, the Last Viewed list is hidden. It can be displayed and hidden again, similar to the whole Navigation section. See
.
Figure 27: Last Viewed
When it is visible, Last Viewed lists the five last-viewed panes. The details for each item in the list can be opened directly from the Last Viewed list by clicking the corresponding item.
Details View
Details view shows and (for some objects) allows modification of information that is related to the object that is selected in the Navigation Panel (see
Deployment Guide 107
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
).
illustrates an example of the Details view for a department.
Figure 28: Details View
Object Actions
Most of the iWD Manager objects can be modified, in which case the Save,
Save & Close, Cancel, and Delete actions are available at the bottom of the
Details views (see Figure 29 ):
•
Save: Saves the current object, and leaves it selected.
•
Save & Close: Saves and closes the current object.
•
Cancel: Discards any modifications and closes the current object.
•
Delete: Deletes the current object.
•
Copy: iWD Manager has built-in copy and paste functionality for the following configuration objects: Services, Departments, Processes, Rules, and Business Calendars. Services, Rules, and Business Calendars are pasted as new objects that must be saved. Departments and Processes perform cascaded copy; child rules also are copied. Clicking
Copy
on the
108 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview edit page of an object puts it in the clipboard (only one object at a time is supported). When the clipboard contains an object, depending on the object type, additional tree nodes or buttons will be visible/enabled that allow pasting the clipboard object to a new instance.
Figure 29: Details View Actions
Note:
The ability to modify an object also depends on the user's permissions.
If the user does not have permission to modify a particular object, the previously described object actions will not be accessible.
Unsaved Changes
iWD Manager keeps track of any changes that have been made to the current selected object by a user.
If an object is being closed, but unsaved changes are present, iWD Manager will display the
Unsaved Changes
dialog box, shown in Figure 30 . The dialog
box has the following actions:
•
Continue: Discards the modifications and closes the object
•
Return: Returns to the Details view of the object and does not discard the modifications.
Figure 30: Unsaved Changes
Context History
In addition to warning about unsaved changes, iWD Manager also records all saved changes into the object's Context history. Context history can be viewed by clicking the
Context History
icon in the top-right corner of the object's
Details view.
shows an example Context History for a Linear Rule.
The Context History appears in a new window and displays detailed information about all of the changes that have been made to the current object:
•
Date/Time: When the modification was made.
•
User: Who made the modification.
Deployment Guide 109
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Manager Overview
•
Object Code: Describes the object type (such as RL, which means “Linear
Rule”).
•
Event Code: Describes the action type (such as UPD, which means
“Update”).
•
Event: Formatted description of the change.
Figure 31: Context History
Additionally, for
UPD
(update) events, the Context History provides details on each attribute of an object that has been changed. These details can be viewed by clicking a particular UPD event in the upper table. They are displayed in the
Event pane.
User Profile
You can customize date/time conversions and iWD Manager appearance in the
User Profile dialog box, shown in
. To access the User Profile dialog
box, click the user name in the Header bar (see “Header Bar” on page 104
). If
Timezone
is not specified, all timestamps will be shown by using the UTC time
110 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration zone. The
User Profile
also allows you to specify your
Locale
, which determines the format that is used for dates, times, numbers, and currency.
Figure 32: User Profile Dialog Box
General Configuration
The General configuration section (see Figure 33
) provides the ability to manage general tenant-level configuration:
•
Use Profile view (see
page 112 ) to view and modify general tenant
attributes.
•
Use Import and Export view (see page 114
) to import and export tenant's configuration to and from XML files.
•
Use Security Policies view (see page 116
) to manage tenant roles and permissions.
•
Use Managed Tenant Details view (see page 118
) to create new managed tenants, and view and modify attributes of managed tenants.
•
Use Lookup Tables view (see
) to specify tenant-specific constants as key/label pairs.
•
Use History view (see
) to keep track of changes in tenant configuration.
Deployment Guide 111
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Profile
Figure 33: General Configuration Section
The Profile view (see
) displays and allows modification of general tenant details, such as name, description, and default time zone.
Figure 34: Profile View
Table 1 lists the properties and actions available in the Profile view.
Table 1: Profile View Attributes and Actions
Property/Action Description
ID
Name
Tenant ID. This field is read-only after the first save.
Tenant name. This field is only editable by parent tenant’s administrators.
112 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Table 1: Profile View Attributes and Actions (Continued)
Property/Action Description
CME Tenant The name of the corresponding tenant in Genesys
Configuration Server. The iWD
System
Tenant is associated with the
Resources
tenant in a single-tenant
Configuration Server, and with the
Environment
tenant in a multi-tenant Configuration Server.
When you create your iWD Tenant, select the corresponding Configuration Server Tenant from the drop-down list. This ensures that the user in iWD Manager has access to the Configuration Server data objects for which the user has permission.
Tenant description. Description
Time Zone Tenant default time zone. The default time zone is used when no time zone is specified for a capture point.
Custom Tenant
Attributes
Save/Save &
Close/Cancel
Inventory
Custom tenant attributes that provide additional information about the tenant for reporting purposes. Refer to the iWD 8.0 Data Mart Reference Guide for more information.
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Opens the tenant business process inventory report that contains detailed information about tenant business configuration (such as departments, processes, and rules).
See Figure 35 for an example).
Deployment Guide 113
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Figure 35: Inventory Report
Import and Export
The Import/Export function enables you to import and export the iWD configuration to and from an XML file. This function allows you to:
•
Transfer configurations between environments and tenants.
•
Load the configuration from the solution template, an exported configuration of a solution that can be used as the basis for configuring a new solution
shows the Import/Export function.
114 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Figure 36: Import/Export
Table 2 lists the properties and actions available in the Import/Export view.
Table 2: Import and Export Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
Allows selection of a configuration file to import.
Configuration
File/Browse
Import
Export custom attributes
Export security policy
Export lookup tables
Export Solution
Business
Configuration
Imports the configuration file that is selected in the field above.
Whether to include the tenant’s custom attributes (see
page 112 ) in the exported configuration file.
Whether to include the tenant’s security policies (see
page 116 ) in the exported configuration file.
Whether to include the tenant’s lookup tables (see
) in the exported configuration file.
Whether to include the tenant’s Solution Business
Configuration (such as departments, processes, rules, and business calendars) in the exported configuration file.
Export Solution
Technical
Configuration
Whether to include the tenant’s Solution Technical
Configuration (such as runtime nodes and services) in the exported configuration file.
Deployment Guide 115
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Table 2: Import and Export Properties and Actions (Continued)
Property/Action Description
Solutions
Modules
Export
Which of the tenant’s solutions (see
in the exported configuration file.
Which of the tenant’s modules (see page 126
) to include in the exported configuration file.
Exports the configuration objects that are selected above to an XML configuration file.
Security Policies
A Security Policy (see
) allows you to create custom security roles for each tenant and map them to Genesys Configuration Server Access Groups.
During authentication, a user is granted all of the permissions that are combined from roles that are mapped to the Genesys Configuration Server
Access Groups of which the user is a member. A role can contain any combination of permissions from three groups: administrative permissions
(technical configuration), configuration permissions (business user configuration), and task management permissions (the Global Task List view in iWD Manager). For them to function properly, most permissions must be added in groups; for example, modify or delete permissions are useless without the view permission.
Users (
Person
objects) are assigned to these groups in Genesys Configuration
Server. Any person assigned to a group that you choose to map to under Group
Mapping will have all the selected permissions within iWD Manager. You
116 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration might have to create multiple new Access Groups in Genesys Configuration
Server so the appropriate mapping can be done in the Security Policy dialog.
Figure 37: Security Policies
Key features:
•
Multiple roles can be mapped to the same Genesys Configuration Server
Access Group.
•
Any Person or User in Genesys Configuration Server who is a member of the Administrators or Super Administrators access group in the
Environment Tenant has non-restricted access to all tenants.
•
Automatic Access Group lookup from Genesys Configuration Server.
Table 3 lists the properties available for Security Policies.
Table 3: Security Policy Properties
Property
Name
Description
Role name. This is a mandatory field and must be unique within the tenant.
Deployment Guide 117
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Table 3: Security Policy Properties (Continued)
Property
Group Mapping
Description
Description
Configuration Server Access Group mapping. This is a mandatory field. Select the Configuration Server Access
Group from the drop-down list.
A plain text description of the role (up to 4,000 characters).
Note:
In iWD 8.0, iWD maintains its own security roles. These roles are independent from Roles that are defined in Genesys Administrator.
That is, for a single user defined in the Genesys System, they may be assigned one or more roles in Genesys Administrator, as well as inheriting one or more roles that have been defined in iWD Manager.
The roles in Genesys Administrator are used to define which tasks a user can perform in specific applications, such as Genesys
Administrator itself as well as Genesys Interaction Workspace. The roles in iWD are used to define what tasks a user can perform in iWD
Manager.
Managed Tenant Details
The Managed Tenant Details view (shown in
) displays and allows
you to modify general managed tenant attributes (see “Tenants” on page 29 ).
Figure 38: Managed Tenant
118 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Table 4 lists the attributes and actions available in Managed Tenant view.
Table 4: Managed Tenant Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
ID Tenant ID. This field becomes read-only after a tenant is created.
Name
CME Tenant
Tenant name.
The name of the corresponding tenant in Genesys
Configuration Server.
When creating your iWD Tenant, select the corresponding
Configuration Server Tenant from the drop-down list. This ensures that the user in iWD Manager only has access to the Configuration Server data objects for which he or she has permission.
In a single-tenant environment the configured managed tenant must map to the
Resources
tenant in Genesys
Configuration Server.
An iWD Managed Tenant may have a one-to-one relationship with a tenant in Genesys Configuration
Server.
Description Tenant description.
Assigned Modules Modules (or functionality) that are assigned to the tenant.
Such modules are available for use in tenant solutions.
Unassigned
Modules
Save/Save &
Close/Cancel/
Delete
Modules that are not assigned to the tenant. Such modules are not available for use in tenant solutions.
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Deployment Guide 119
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Lookup Tables
Users can specify lookup tables that can be used in rules, custom attributes, and metrics. Lookup tables are simple key/label pairs and are displayed as
dropdown controls. See Figure 39 .
Figure 39: Lookup Tables
Distribution Points and Lookup Tables
The concept of Distribution Points has changed in iWD 8.0. They are no longer required, but to keep reporting functionality intact they remain as configuration objects in iWD (as opposed to the Services they were in earlier releases).
Distribution points should be configured as Lookup Tables (see page 120 ) at
the Tenant level. The following procedure describes the steps used to configure
Distribution Points as Lookup Tables.
120 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
Procedure:
Configuring Distribution Points as Lookup Tables
Purpose: To configure Distribution Points as Lookup Tables and assign them to Rules.
Start of procedure
1. In iWD Manager, configure a new Lookup Table for your tenant as shown
in Figure 40 . The name of the Lookup Table must be
distributionPoints
.
Note:
The distributionPoints
lookup table must be configured under the iWD managed tenant in which the rule action to assign the distribution point to a task is defined.
Deployment Guide
Figure 40: Create a Lookup Table
121
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
2. In a new or existing Rule Template, add the newly created Lookup Table
(Distribution Point) as a parameter, as shown in
.
Figure 41: Add as a Parameter to the Rule Template
3. Add an Action.You can copy and paste the Language Expression and Rule
Language Mapping from the rule action
Assign distribution point
that is part of the Standard Rules Template. If you have created a new rule
template, follow the procedure Procedure: Adding a Rule Template to your
.
Figure 42: Add an Action
122 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration
4. Once the rule template has been updated with the new action, the
Distribution Point can be assigned in Classification Rules, as shown in
.
Figure 43: Classification Rules
End of procedure
Next Steps
It is possible to configure separate sets of Distribution Points for each Solution:
•
On the Tenant level, several Lookup Tables should be created, each with its own set of Distribution Points.
•
Several Rule Templates should be created. Each has to use its own Lookup
Table.
•
On the Tenant level, several Modules should be created and corresponding
Rule Templates should be assigned.
•
On the Solution level, corresponding Modules should be assigned to the particular Solution.
Each Solution will “see” its own set of Distribution Points during Rules creation.
History
The History page (see
) provides a detailed log of activities that have been performed in iWD Manager by users. Each activity is represented by an
Deployment Guide 123
Chapter 4: Configuration General Configuration audit event that represents what was changed, by whom, and when the change was made.
Figure 44: History
Table 5 lists the properties and actions are available in History view.
Table 5: History View Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
Date/Time Date/time when the activity was performed.
User
Object Code
Who performed the activity.
Represents the type of object on which the activity was performed:
•
TNT
: Tenant
•
SLT
: Solution
•
SRV_INS
: Service Instance
•
RNT_ND
: Runtime Node
•
RL_TMP
: Rule Template
•
MDL
: Module
•
PRC
: Process
•
RL
: Rule
•
DPT
: Department
•
ROLE
: Security Policy Role
•
BC
: Business Calendar
124 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
Table 5: History View Properties and Actions (Continued)
Property/Action Description
Event Code Represents the type of activity:
•
CRT
: Create
•
UPD
: Update
•
DLT
: Delete
•
IMP
: Import
•
EXP
: Export
Formatted description of the activity.
Event
Details Displays attribute-level changes to the object for the activity that is selected in the main History table. Only update activities (Event Code is
UPD
) contain these details.
Modules and Components
The Modules and Components configuration section is used to define objects for iWD functionality:
•
A component is an object that provides a specific iWD function. The following component types are used in iWD:
Service templates: This component provides a template for an iWD service that implements specific functionality. Service templates are preconfigured and are not changeable in iWD Manager. Service
instances (see page 139 ) that are based on service templates, however,
are configurable.
Rule templates (see
Metrics templates (see page 135 )
•
) is a group of components.
Assigning Modules to Tenants and Solutions
Whenever you create a new Tenant or a new Solution under a Tenant, be sure to verify the Assigned Modules are correct for the Tenant or Solution.
After you create a new Tenant, go to the General section in iWD Manager.
Select the System tenant from the tenant selection drop-down list. In the navigation tree, locate your new Tenant in the Managed Tenant tree. On the right hand side of the screen, be sure that the
Assigned Modules
list includes all
Modules to which you want the Managed Tenant to have access.
After you create a new Solution under that Managed Tenant, select that
Managed Tenant from the tenant selector, and then click on the name of your
Deployment Guide 125
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
Solution in the navigation tree. On the right hand side of the screen, make sure you assign the Modules you want to use as part of that Solution.
Modules
Modules bundle a set of iWD components into a named functional area.
Modules are used to group “features”, such as capture from WebSphere, reporting, and so on. Each feature maybe be implemented by one or more components where the component can be a service, a rule template, a metric template and a (transformation) script.
This is done in order to:
•
simplify the exporting/importing of configuration that enables particular functions.
•
simplify the enabling/disabling of a particular function to a tenant.
shows an example.
Figure 45: Module
126 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
Table 6 lists the properties and actions available in the Modules view:
Table 6: Modules View Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
Name
Is Inherited
Name of the module
Indicates whether a module is inherited from the parent tenant. This means that the module has been assigned to this managed tenant by the parent tenant. If this is true, all fields are read-only. All standard modules in iWD belong to the
System
tenant, and are inherited by child tenants.
Description
Assigned
Components
Description of the module.
Services, rule templates, metrics templates, and scripts that belong to the module.
Unassigned
Components
Services and rule templates that do not belong to the module.
Save/Save & Close/
Cancel/Delete
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Rule Templates
In the iWD solution, Rule templates are used to set up different business rules for task classification, department, and processes, as well as rules at the global level. Business rules usually have the following:
•
Conditions—“when” or “if” expressions
•
Actions—“then” expressions (required)
•
Parameters—used in the actions and conditions
Business rules within iWD are based on Rule templates that are provided out-of-the-box. The out-of-the-box Rule templates are maintained by IT personnel. IT personnel may create new Rule templates and modify out-of-the-box templates to meet business requirements. Business rule templates provide the foundation for business users to create business rules that govern task handling in iWD. Business users are empowered to make the necessary changes to business rules while IT personnel manage the rule template.
Note:
Definition of Rule templates requires a basic knowledge of the Java programming language.
After you create a new Rule Template, you have to explicitly add it to your
Solution. This outlined in the following procedure.
Deployment Guide 127
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
Procedure:
Adding a Rule Template to your Solution
Purpose: New Rule Templates need to be explicitly added to your Solution before you can use them. This procedure outlines how to add the Rule
Template to your Solution.
Start of procedure
1. Create the new Rule Template (
Modules & Components > Rule Templates >
New
) and save it (refer to Table 7
for the configurable properties). Your new
Rule Template will become a new Component, which needs to be added to a Module.
2. Add the new Rule Template Component to an existing Module, or create a new Module and add it there. Do this by going to Modules & Components >
Modules
. You should see your new Rule Template in the
Unassigned
Components
list. Check it and click the arrow to move it to the
Assigned
Components
list. Save the change.
3. If you used an existing Module in
Step 2 , and that Module is already
assigned to your Solution, you should be done. If you created a new
, then you need to add this Module to your Solution. Go to
Services
, select your Tenant, and then click on the name of your
Solution. There you will see a list of
Assigned Modules
and
Unassigned
Modules
. Select your new Module (with your Rule Template in it) from the list of Unassigned Components . Click the arrow to move it to the Assigned
Modules
list. Save the change.
4. If you added the Rule Template to an existing Module, you do not need to redeploy your Solution in order to use the new template. If you created a
new Module in Step 2 , you will be prompted to deploy the Solution first.
Note:
These steps assume you have created the Rule Template under a specific iWD Tenant. You can follow the same steps to create a new template under the System Tenant, if desired.
End of procedure
128 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
Table 7 lists the properties available in Rule Template view.
Table 7: Rule Template View Properties
Property
Rule Template
Name
Conditions
Description
The name of the rule template. This field is mandatory.
Actions
The rule condition template; that is, a when or if expression (for example, when due time is in x hours). The
Rule template can contain any number of (or no) conditions. See
.
The rule action template; that is, a then expression (for example, then assign priority). The Rule template can contain any number of actions. See
Parameters Rule parameters that are used in conditions and actions.
These describe how parameters are presented to the user
(who is creating the rule), how input is validated, and so
on. See “Parameters” on page 131
.
Functions Allows definition of more complex functions, which then can be referenced in actions and conditions. See
Save/Save & Close/
Cancel
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Deployment Guide 129
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
Conditions and Actions
Although conditions and actions have different purposes, their definition is the same.
Table 8 lists the property specifications.
Table 8: Conditions and Actions Properties
Property
Language
Expression
Rule Language
Mapping
Description
Semantics of the rule language; meant for business people.
They are simple enough to be understood by non-Java specialists. Language expressions can contain different parameters.
Warning: Do not use the word end
in rule language expressions. Using the word end
causes rule parsing errors.
The same rule language expression, in Java code. This is the real code that is executed; it requires an understanding of Java and JBoss rules. JBoss is the underlying rule engine used in iWD.
shows an example of conditions for a Rule template.
Figure 46: Rules Template—Conditions Tab
Reviewing the third condition, the language expression contains the parameter
{department}
, which is mapped to the rule language. This expression is executed for each task to which this rule can apply, as follows: the parameter is replaced with the current parameter value, which is compared to the task department value, which in turn is retrieved by calling a Task object method and converted to an integer value. During the building of rules, only the
130 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components language expressions are visible to business users. This enables them to build rules that are easy to read and understand.
Note:
Rule language mapping follows JBoss Rules syntax (which is Java with some minor extensions). Regarding available methods, there is a single variable available to rules called
$data
which represents task attributes as a key-value collection. It is an instance of the
KeyValueCollection
class which is part of Platform SDK (refer to the
Platform SDK 7.6 (or later) Developer’s Guide for more information).
Parameters
Rule-language expressions and the corresponding language mappings (used in conditions and actions) can contain different parameters. For example, the expression
Process is {process}
has the parameter process
.
shows an example of parameters for a Rule template.
Figure 47: Rules Template—Parameters Tab
Parameters that are used as simple input controls appear only as specific names in action and condition definitions. If a parameter (such as a combo box) is more complex than a simple input control, it must be defined in the Parameters
lists the properties in the Parameters tab.
Deployment Guide 131
Chapter 4: Configuration
132
Modules and Components
Table 9: Parameters Tab Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
Parameter Name
Parameter Type
Configuration
The name of the parameter. This field is mandatory.
The type of input control for the parameter. There are six input control types:
•
SelectConstant
: constant combo box with labels and values.
•
SelectDynamic
: dynamic combo box. Labels and values are received from the specific Java class that implements the interface evo.rules.cmc.RuleSelectDynamicSource.
•
InputText
: input box that allows you to enter any text.
•
InputInteger
: input box that allows you to enter integer values.
•
InputNumber
: input box that allows you to enter number values.
•
InputDate
: input box that allows you to enter date values.
•
LookupTable
: drop-down box with key value pairs that were defined under
Tenant > Lookup Tables.
•
SelectDynamicFiltered
: dynamic combo box with a filter. That Java class that implements
RuleSelectDynamicFilteredSource
.
This field is mandatory.
The attributes for
SelectConstant
and
SelectDynamic type parameters.
The pattern for
SelectConstant
is the following:
“<value_1>”:”<label_1>”, “<value_2>”:”<label_2>”,
..., “<value_n>”:”<label_n>”
The pattern for
SelectDynamic
is the following:
<package name>.<class name>
This field is mandatory for
SelectConstant
and
SelectDynamic
type parameters.
Mapping several instances of a parameter to a single parameter definition
The underscore ( _ ) character in parameter names has a special meaning when building rule templates. It is used to specify an index of the parameter, if the rule expression requires more than one instance of the particular parameter.
The most common example is a range definition. intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
For example, suppose you need to create a condition which has to check if the task’s due date is in the date1
to date2
range, or in the date3
to date4
range.
There are two possible approaches:
1. Create a condition such as:
Due is in “{dueDT1}” to “{dueDT2}” or in “{dueDT3}” to “{dueDT4}”
This will require the definition of 4 parameters with type InputDate in the
Parameters section. This approach is not very convenient, especially if there is more than one occurrence of the condition/action.
2. Use underscore and index:
Due is in “{dueDT_1}” to “{dueDT_2}” or in “{dueDT_3}” to
“{dueDT_4}”
Using this approach, you need to specify only one parameter, with name dueDT
and type
InputDate
.
Note:
Rules will not be executed properly if you use underscores while defining parameters in the rule template (for example, dueDT
or thisIsMyTextParam will work fine, whereas due_DT or this_Is_My_Test_Param
will not be recognized). Use underscores only when referring to the multiple instances of the same parameter when creating conditions and actions, as described above.
Functions
When defining rule templates, elements that are more complex than conditions
and actions might be required. The Functions tab (see Figure 48 ) enables you
to write specific Java functions for different purposes for use in rule templates.
The specified functions are used in the Rule Language Mappings.
Note:
During use of a rule function in a condition or action, make sure that each function name and parameter is prefixed with a space, such as the following; otherwise, the function might not be recognized by the rules parser: eval( someFunction( param1, param2) )
Deployment Guide 133
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
Figure 48: Rules Template—Functions Tab
lists the properties that are available in the Functions tab.
Table 10: Functions Tab Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
Function Name
Description
Body
The name of the function. This property is mandatory.
A short description of the function. This property is optional.
The function code, with the following syntax: function <return type> <function name>(<arguments>) {...}
This field is mandatory.
134 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Modules and Components
Metrics Templates
Metrics templates can be used to define various types of metrics that will be available at the business user level to specify actual values for departments and processes. Metrics templates are just like any other module components and must be assigned to a module to be available under departments and processes.
shows an example.
Figure 49: MetricsTemplate
lists value types for the Metric template. Refer to “Metrics” on page 203
for more information about Metrics.
Table 11: Metric Template Value Types
Value Type
Time
Flag
Number
Description
Time value in days, hours, minutes, or hours.
Check box for true/false values.
Number value, basic number validation.
Deployment Guide 135
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
Table 11: Metric Template Value Types (Continued)
Value Type
Percentage
Date
Lookup Table
Description
Percentage from 0% to 100%.
Calendar control for selecting month, day, and year.
Drop-down list of Lookup Tables configured under the
Tenant.
Solutions and Services
The Services configuration section allows the setup of iWD runtime instances for a specific infrastructure and environment:
•
Use Solution Details view (see page 137
) to create new solutions, as well as to view and modify general solution attributes.
•
Use Runtime Nodes view (see
) to define runtime nodes in which services will run.
•
Use Services view (see page 139 ) to monitor and manage service status.
•
Use Service Details view (see
) to create new services, as well as to view and modify configuration of existing services.
•
Use Deployment view (see page 143 ) to deploy solution configuration to
runtime nodes, as well as to activate services.
•
Use Change History view (see
) to check the history of each deployed configuration version.
Note:
It is recommended that you do not create any Solutions and Services under the System Tenant. You should do so under a Managed Tenant.
The recommended role for the System Tenant is to be the place where you create all of your Modules and Components (which is done by importing the various configuration xml files); these Modules can then be inherited by the Managed Tenants and assigned or unassigned as needed at the Managed Tenant level.
136 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
Solution Details
Solution Details view displays, and lets you modify, general solution attributes.
For more information on solutions, refer to “Solutions” on page 30 of
.
shows an example.
Figure 50: Solution Details
lists the properties and actions available in Solution Details view.
Table 12: Solution Details Attributes and Actions
Property/Action Description
ID The ID of the solution. This field becomes read-only after the solution is created.
Name
Description
The name of the solution.
A description of the solution.
Assigned Modules Modules (or functionality) that are assigned to the solution. Components such as Services and Rule templates from these modules are available for use in the solution.
Unassigned
Modules
Modules that have not been assigned to the solution.
Components from these modules are not available for use in the solution.
Save/Save &
Close/Cancel/
Delete
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Deployment Guide 137
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
Runtime Nodes
Runtime Nodes view lets you view and configure the runtime nodes in which
the solution's services are running. See “Runtime Nodes” on page 30
for more information about runtime nodes.
shows an example.
Figure 51: Runtime Node
describes the properties and actions that are available in Runtime
Nodes view.
Table 13: Runtime Node Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
Name
Context URL
The name of the runtime node.
The URL of the runtime node. This depends on how the runtime node was installed. For example, a possible context URL is http://localhost:8080/iwd_node, where
8080
is the port used by Tomcat, and iwd_node
is the Runtime Node webapp in the Tomcat container.
New...
Allows for definition of a new runtime node.
138 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
Table 13: Runtime Node Properties and Actions (Continued)
Property/Action Description
Application
Save/Save &
Close/Cancel/
Delete
The iWD Runtime Node application, as configured in the
Configuration Server database. This application is the one that will manage the connection to Interaction Server.
Each Runtime Node must have its own configured
Runtime Node application in Configuration
Manager/Genesys Administrator.
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Services
Services view displays the status of each service that has been configured in the solution and allows you to manage service status manually. Refer to
of Chapter 2 for more information about services.
shows an example.
Figure 52: Services View
Deployment Guide 139
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
describes the properties and actions that are available in the Services view.
Table 14: Services View Properties and Actions
Attribute/Action Description
Runtime Node
Service Name
The runtime node on which the service is running. This field is absent for any service that runs on all available runtime nodes.
The name of the service. Click here to open the Service
Details view (see
Starts a stopped service.
Status
Status Message
Log
Stops a started service.
Service status:
•
Started
—the service is active (running).
•
Scheduled
—the service is scheduled to run in the future.
•
Queue
—the service is scheduled to run after another job that is in the same execution queue has finished.
•
Stopped
—the service is stopped.
•
Error
—the service has encountered an error during its last operation; error details are provided in the Status
Message column.
•
Not Deployed
—the service is configured in the solution, but the configuration is not yet deployed to the runtime node.
•
Not Accessible
—the runtime node is not accessible.
This can be caused by an invalid runtime node configuration or because the application server on which the node is installed is not running.
Displays additional service-status details, when available, such as an error message. Click it to view details in a larger window (shortcut menu).
Opens the Log Viewer dialog box (see
specified service.
Service Details
Service Details view (see
) displays, and lets you modify, service
attributes. See also “iWD Services” on page 146 for a detailed reference on
specific service types.
140 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
Figure 53: Service Details
describes the properties and actions that are available in the Service
Details view.
Table 15: Service Details View Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
ID The ID of the service. This field becomes read-only after the service has been created. When a new service is created in iWD configuration, the default ID generated by iWD is based on the type of service being created. For example, if a new Web Service Capture Point service is created, the default ID generated by iWD will be
WS_CP_x
, where x
is an integer that increments as additional Web
Service Capture Point services are created.
Service Name The name of the service.
Deployment Guide 141
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
Table 15: Service Details View Properties and Actions (Continued)
Property/Action Description
Service Template The template on which the service is based. This field becomes read-only when the service is created. See
“Modules and Components” on page 125
for more information about service templates.
Runtime Node The runtime node on which the service runs. This field is absent for any service that is running on all available runtime nodes.
A description of the service. Description
Properties The properties of the service that configure its functionality:
•
Name
—the name of the property.
•
Default
—whether to use the property’s default value.
•
Value
—the property’s value. Depending on property type, this field can be a text box, check box, or dropdown box. When the
Default
box has been checked, this field is read-only.
Different service types have different properties. For a
detailed reference on specific service types, see “iWD
.
Save/Save &
Close/Cancel/
Delete
View Tasks
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Opens the Global Task List view in iWD Manager. This action is available only for capture points.
142 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
Deployment
Changes to the configuration in iWD Manager are not automatically activated.
Deploy, shown in
, performs this task by distributing a solution's configuration across the defined runtime nodes.
Figure 54: Deploy
describes the properties and actions that are available in Deploy.
Table 16: Deploy Properties and Actions
Property/Action Description
Undeployed
Changes/
Undeployed
Changes Details
Comments
Detailed information about activities performed in iWD
Manager since the last deployment. For more details, see
Deployment comments. They will be displayed as version
comments in the Change History (see page 144 ).
Deployment Guide 143
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services
Table 16: Deploy Properties and Actions (Continued)
Property/Action Description
Deploy
Undeploy
Schedule
Deployment
Deploys the configuration. Depending on the configuration’s complexity and runtime environment characteristics, this action can take several seconds.
Note: Deployment deploys the entire solution whether it is done from the Services section or from the Departments and Processes section. When deploying changes in the
Departments and Processes section, all changes made to
Services will also be deployed.
All configured runtime nodes must be available to deploy.
Deployment generates and copies a set of configuration
XML files and JBoss rules files to runtime nodes. The configuration files are stored in the
WEB-INF/config directory under the runtime node, but the Deploy function handles the files and manual intervention or manipulation of the files is not needed. All files are always regenerated and overwritten each time the configuration is deployed.
Stops all of the services of a solution, and undeploys the configuration from all available runtime nodes. If any runtime node that is defined in the solution is not available, iWD Manager will display a warning message.
All configured services are deactivated. Deployed configuration files are removed and the runtime node reloads the empty configuration.
Allows deployment to be performed on a specific date/hour. This allows you to deploy changes during a quiet period, when there is nothing happening in the system.
Note: If you have more than one iWD Manager instance connected to a single iWD Configuration database, there iwd.host parameter in the iwd.properties
file must be unique for every host on which iWD Manager is running.
The iwd.properties file can be found in the web application server’s webapps
folder for iWD Manager. For example, for Tomcat this might be
<TomcatDirectory>\webapps\iwd_manager\WEB-INF\ classes
Change History
Change History maintains the history of deployed configuration versions.
Whenever a solution configuration is deployed, a new configuration version
144 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Solutions and Services record is created that contains all of the changes that have been made in the
configuration since the previous version (deployment). Figure 55 shows an
example.
Figure 55: Change History
describes the attributes and actions that are available in Change
History view.
Table 17: Change History Attributes and Actions
Attribute/Action Description
Deployed On
Deployed By
Comments
When the configuration was deployed.
Who deployed the configuration.
Deployment comments.
Log Viewer
Log Viewer (see
) allows you to view iWD service log files remotely.
Various viewing methods can be used, including near-real-time viewing with
Deployment Guide 145
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Auto Refresh functionality, as well as viewing of historical log files for the particular service.
Figure 56: Log Viewer
iWD Services
iWD services implement actual iWD functionality, such as capturing tasks or loading data into the Data Mart. iWD Services are classified as Core Services,
Capture Points, or Reporting Services.
Note:
Services are configured per solution, and each solution must be configured under a tenant in iWD Manager. Therefore, before configuring services, you must configure a tenant and solution. Refer
to Chapter 3, “Installation,” on page 37 for more information.
Core iWD Services
Core iWD services are mandatory in any iWD solution and enable the core iWD functionality:
146 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
•
Rules Service—Is a mediator between iWD services and rule engine implementation. It allows iWD services to execute various rules
•
Logging Service—Provides internal logging capabilities within an iWD solution
•
Configuration Server Connector Service—Maintains a physical connection to the Genesys Configuration Server
•
Interaction Server Connector Service—Maintains a physical connection to the Genesys Interaction Server
•
Business Context Management Service—Works in conjunction with the
Rules service to enable business rules to be invoked from within routing strategies.
Capture Points
Capture points represent an interface for feeding tasks to iWD. A number of different capture points are available, such as the following:
•
Web Service Capture Point Service—Provides the ability for third-party applications to submit tasks to iWD via a Web service interface. It also provides an interface for managing submitted tasks, such as holding and restarting.
•
Database Capture Point Service—Captures tasks directly from database tables. Configuration for this is based on SQL.
•
XML File Capture Point Service—Captures tasks from XML files. The files should comply with the iWD Task XML schema.
•
WebSphere MQ Capture Point Service—Captures tasks from systems using IBM WebSphere MQ as a message bus. Refer to the iWD 8.0
WebSphere MQ Capture Adapter Reference Guide for more information about this capture point.
•
Beginning in version 8.0.2, eServices offers integrated JMS Capture Point functionality. Refer to the eServices documentation for more information.
Version 8.0.210 of eServices (specifically, the Interaction Server component) also includes integrated XML File Capture Point functionality.
Version 8.1.0 of eServices (the Interaction Server component) includes an integrated Database Capture Point.
Note:
In order for iWD to function properly, a Capture Point ID is required for all tasks. Therefore, when capturing tasks through media servers other than iWD capture points, such as through Genesys E-mail
Server or Genesys SMS Server, you must configure a “dummy”
capture point. Refer to Appendix C, “Adapting the iWD Business
Process for Standard Genesys Channels,” on page 275 for additional
information.
Deployment Guide 147
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Reporting
The Statistics Adapter Service allows performance of custom aggregations on data and sends the resulting statistics to Genesys Stat Server. Statistics then can be viewed in CCPulse+ or any other Stat Server client.
Historical reporting is enabled by a number of ETL jobs that transform and load iWD runtime data into a separate reporting database that is called the iWD
Data Mart (see Table 18 for a list of preconfigured ETL jobs). Essentially, the
iWD Data Mart is a set of star schemas that contain historical iWD data that is optimized for reporting. The ETL jobs are set up as scheduled services in iWD.
Refer to the iWD Data Mart Reference Guide for more information.
Table 18: Preconfigured ETL Jobs
Job Function
Initialize iWD Data
Load Configuration
Load Intraday
Attribute
Job Name
Function
Schedule
Job Name
Function
Schedule
Job Name
Function
Schedule
Description
Initialize
Initializes the necessary data structures, and populates static dimensions, such as the
AGE dimension.
Runs once.
Load Configuration
Loads updates from iWD configuration tables into dimension tables.
Configurable through service properties; typically runs on a 15-minute cycle.
Load Intraday
Loads updates from the Interaction Server database tables into core fact tables.
Configurable through services properties; recommended that it be scheduled to run after the
Load Configuration Job ends through the Job
Dependency option.
148 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 18: Preconfigured ETL Jobs (Continued)
Job Function
Aggregate Intraday
Attribute
Job Name
Function
Aggregate Statistics
Load Historical
Aggregate Historical
Maintain iWD
Schedule
Job Name
Function
Schedule
Job Name
Function
Schedule
Job Name
Function
Schedule
Job Name
Function
Schedule
Description
Aggregate Intraday
Aggregates data that previously was loaded into fact tables by the Load Intraday Job into aggregation tables.
Recommended that it be scheduled immediately after the Load Intraday Job has completed— typically, running every 15 minutes. The frequency of this aggregate job does not have any bearing on the 15-minute aggregate that is being populated.
Aggregate Statistics
Generate statistics by executing statistics plug-ins.
Recommended that it be scheduled immediately after the Aggregate Intraday Job has completed, because most of the statistics plug-ins are using aggregated facts.
Load Historical
Moves data from intraday fact tables into historical fact tables.
Runs daily through the schedule that is defined in the service properties.
Aggregate Historical
Aggregates data from historical fact tables into
15-minute, hourly, daily, and monthly aggregation tables.
Runs once a day, after the Load Historical Job.
Maintain
Cleanses historical tables—that is, removes expired facts from these tables, based on rules that are defined on the ETL Service property in iWD
Manager.
Runs once a day, after the Aggregate Historical Job.
Deployment Guide 149
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 18: Preconfigured ETL Jobs (Continued)
Job Function
Prune events and interactions
Attribute
Job Name
Function
Schedule
Description
Prune
Removes event logs and interactions from the databases that are loaded in the Data Mart when tasks/interactions have reached their final state.
Runs once a day, after the Maintain Job.
Workforce Management
iWD 8.0 supports Workforce Management objects. A new service has been added, that uses the template “Workforce Management Connector”.
Configuring this service allows you to see some objects that exist in the WFM database.
Recommended Order of Configuration for iWD Services
lists the iWD services in their recommended order of configuration and indicates any dependencies on other services.
Scripting Service
Note:
The following table includes all iWD services. The Installation chapter does not provide information on how to configure each service, only some of the services. The general procedure is the same for each service.
Table 19: iWD Services
Name
Logging Service
Configuration Server
Connector
Yes
Interaction Server
Connector
Yes
Mandatory Category
Yes Core
Core
Core
No Core
Dependencies
None
None
Notes
See
See
Genesys
Configuration Server
Connector
See
None Required only when iWD transformation is being used in
WebSphere MQ or
XML Capture Points.
See
150 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration
Table 19: iWD Services (Continued)
Name Mandatory Category
Web Service Capture
Point
No
XML File Capture
Point
No
Database Capture
Point
WebSphere MQ
Capture Point
No
No
Rules Service Yes
Business Context
Management Service
Yes
Database Service
Statistics Adapter
No
No
Kettle ETL Service No
Scheduled ETL Job No
WFM Connector No
Capture Point
Capture Point
Capture Point
Capture Point
Core
Core
Reporting
Reporting
Reporting
Reporting
Workforce
Management iWD Services
Dependencies
None
Notes
See
Scripting Service* See
*Scripting Service is only required when iWD transformation is being used.
None See
Scripting Service* See the iWD 8.0
WebSphere MQ
Capture Adapter
Reference Guide for information about deploying this component.
*Scripting Service is only required when iWD transformation is being used.
None See
Genesys
Configuration Server
Connector
See
None
None
See
See
Database See
Kettle ETL Service A separate scheduled
ETL job that must be created for each job type.
See
Genesys
Configuration Server
Connector
See
Deployment Guide 151
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Service Log Levels
For each service, a log level can be specified in the logLevel
property. The level should be set to
Default
unless otherwise directed by Genesys Technical
Support.
The possible log levels are:
•
Default
—uses the log level that was configured for the Logging Service (see
).
•
Debug
—the most detailed informational events that are most useful in debugging an application.
•
Info
—informational messages that highlight the progress of the application.
•
Warning
—potentially harmful situations.
•
Error —error events that might not affect the application’s ability to run.
•
Trace
—turns on all logging.
•
Off
—turns off all logging.
Logging Service
The Logging Service is a mandatory iWD service that provides internal logging capabilities within an iWD solution.
Note:
The Logging Service must be configured even if you only want to create logs through the Genesys Message Server.
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 20 are configurable for the Logging
Service.
Table 20: Logging Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel logAgeInDays
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Info
unless otherwise
Sets the number of days that log files should be kept in the system. A value of
0
disables this limit. This property is not available if logLevel
is set to
Off
.
152 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 20: Logging Service Properties (Continued)
Property
logMaxFileSizeMegaBytes logFilesToKeep logDirectory
Description
Sets a limit on the size of a single log file, in megabytes. A value of
0 disables this limit. This property is not available if logLevel
is set to
Off
.
Sets a limit on the number of log files that are kept for this service, excluding the current log file. A value of
0
disables this limit. This property is not available if logLevel
is set to
Off
.
The directory in which the log files will be stored, for all services. If it starts with
/
(on Unix-based operating systems) or a drive letter (on
Windows), an absolute path will be used; otherwise, the path is relative from the web applications folder on the application server.
Note: It is strongly recommended that you only set the file path to a directory on a local machine, not a remote location such as a shared network drive. Logging to a remote location can severely impact performance.
Configuration Server Connector Service
The Configuration Server Connector service maintains a physical connection to the Genesys Configuration Server. The Configuration Server Connector
service needs to be created manually in iWD Manager.
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 21 are configurable for the
Configuration Server Connector service.
Table 21: Configuration Server Connector Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel reconnectionAttempts
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise
setting of this property, additional logging properties might be
available. Refer to “Logging Service” on page 152
for descriptions of these common properties.
Exception handling:
The maximum number of attempts to connect to Configuration
Server, before connecting to the backup server.
Deployment Guide 153
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 21: Configuration Server Connector Service Properties (Continued)
Property
reconnectionPeriod protocolTimeout eventBufferSize addpTimeout addpRemoteTimeout
Description
Exception handling:
The time, in seconds, between individual reconnection attempts.
Exception handling:
The timeout of the Genesys Configuration Server protocol; specifies the number of milliseconds that the connector will wait for
Configuration Server to respond to the request.
Performance tuning:
The number of Configuration Server events that can be queued up in memory, until they are processed by the service.
Used to configure local and remote timeouts (respectively) for
Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP). In Configuration
Manager or Genesys Administrator, you should enable ADDP on the connection to Interaction Server on the
Connections
tab of your iWD
Runtime Node application.
Used to configure local and remote timeouts (respectively) for
Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP). In Configuration
Manager or Genesys Administrator, you should enable ADDP on the connection to Interaction Server on the
Connections
tab of your iWD
Runtime Node application.
Interaction Server Connector Service
The Interaction Server Connector service maintains a physical connection to the Genesys Interaction Server. This service uses the Genesys Configuration
Server Connector service to retrieve additional configuration data, such as the name of the host and the port of the target Interaction Server.
154 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 22 are configurable for the Interaction
Server Connector service.
Table 22: Interaction Server Connector Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel protocolTimeout eventBufferSize threads attributeFilerInclude
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise instructed by Genesys Technical Support. See
“Service Log Levels” on page 152
for a description of each log level. Depending on the setting of this property, additional
logging properties might be available. Refer to “Logging
for descriptions of these common properties.
Exception handling:
The timeout of the Interaction Server protocol; specifies the number of milliseconds that the connector will wait for
Interaction Server to respond to the request.
Performance tuning: The number of Interaction Server events that can be queued up in memory, until they are processed by the service.
Performance tuning: The size of the thread pool.
This value of this property is used to determine which interaction attached data keys will be used to trigger taskUpdated
notifications to a source system, and which interaction attached data keys will be shown on the iWD
Manager's
Attributes
tab when the task is selected in the
Global Task List. A subset of what is defined by this filter may be negated by the filter specified in the attributeFilterExclude
property.
The wildcards that are allowed are the following:
* (asterisk) any number of any characters
? (question mark) any character.
For example:
*Agent*
: Any pair whose name contains “Agent”
?code
: Any pair whose name starts with any character and ends with “code”
Deployment Guide 155
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 22: Interaction Server Connector Service Properties (Continued)
Property
attributeFilterExclude configurationServerConnector addpTimeout addpRemoteTimeout
Description
This value of this property is used to determine which interaction attached data keys will be filtered out of the list that will trigger taskUpdated
notifications to a source system, and which will be shown on the iWD Manager’s
Attributes tab, when the task is selected in the Global Task List. Any attached data key matching those listed in the attributeFilterExclude
property will be filtered out. By default this filter includes the URS-specific attached data keys.
The wildcards that are allowed are the following:
* (asterisk) any number of any characters
? (question mark) any character
For example:
*Agent*
: Any pair whose name contains “Agent”
?code
: Any pair whose name starts with any character and ends with “code”
Note: It is important to configure this property correctly if you are using any custom task attributes so that they will be displayed on the Attributes tab of the Global Task List as expected.
Mandatory dependency: The Configuration Server Connector
); provides access to the Configuration
Server.
Used to configure local and remote timeouts (respectively) for Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP). In
Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, you should enable ADDP on the connection to Interaction Server on the
Connections
tab of your iWD Runtime Node application.
Used to configure local and remote timeouts (respectively) for Advanced Disconnect Detection Protocol (ADDP). In
Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, you should enable ADDP on the connection to Interaction Server on the
Connections
tab of your iWD Runtime Node application.
Scripting Service
The Scripting Service is an optional iWD service that provides scripting capabilities for message transformation purposes for XML File Capture Points
156 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
(see
) and WebSphere MQ Capture Points (see the iWD 8.0
WebSphere MQ Capture Adapter Reference Guide for more information).
Note:
The iWD Scripting Service is not used for the JMS Integrated Capture
Point. Groovy scripting for XML transformation is supported for the
JMS Capture Point, but the scripting is built into Interaction Server.
Refer to the eServices 8.0 User’s Guide for more information.
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 23 are configurable for the Scripting
Service.
Table 23: Scripting Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise
setting of this property, additional logging properties might be
available. Refer to “Logging Service” on page 152
for descriptions of these common properties.
Web Service Capture Point
The Web Service Capture Point is an iWD service that allows third-party systems to submit and manipulate tasks in iWD via a SOAP Web Service interface.
Note:
When developing an integration to a source system using the iWD
Web Service Capture Adapter in a .NET environment, .NET
Framework 2.0 or higher must be in place.
For more information on the Web Service Capture Point, see the iWD Web
Service Capture API documentation.
Note:
The iWD Web Service Capture API documentation is available at
https://sites.google.com/a/iwdlab.com/iwd8/capture/webservice
Deployment Guide 157
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 24 are configurable for the Web
Service Capture Point.
Table 24: Web Service Capture Point Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel checkIfAlreadyCaptured timezone defaultMediaType defaultTaskExpirationInDays interactionServerConnector webserviceURLMapping
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise
setting of this property, additional logging properties might be
available. Refer to “Logging Service” on page 152
for descriptions of these common properties.
If true, iWD will verify whether another task that has a given captureId
has already been captured.
The time zone of the Web Service Capture Point. Date/time values will be converted from the specified time zone to UTC, before those values are stored in the iWD. If this parameter is not specified, it defaults to the tenant time zone.
The media type attribute that will be assigned to tasks captured by the capture point. The list of available media types is retrieved dynamically from Configuration Server. In Configuration Server itself, the media type attribute is configured as a type of Business
Attribute. The default media type used by the capture point may be overwritten if it is specified in the
<mediaType>
attribute in the
<CreateTask> message.
The default task expiration date. All tasks that are captured by this capture point will expire after the specified amount of days. This value can be overridden by explicitly specifying the task expirationDateTime
attribute in the capture data.
Mandatory dependency: The Interaction Server Connector service
(see
page 154 ) that should be used for connectivity to the Interaction
Server.
The webservice URL mapping. The URL is composed as follows:
<runtime node context URL>/services/ <webserviceURLMapping>, for example: http://server:8080/iwdnode/services/webserviceCapturePoint
.
To retrieve a WSDL file for the Webservice, attach
?WSDL
to the URL.
158 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 24: Web Service Capture Point Properties (Continued)
Property
stringOnlyParameters timeZoneIsSupplied
Description
If selected, only string parameters will be accepted.
If this property is selected ( timezoneIsSupplied
=
ON
), then:
• If the datetime has a timezone set, the date is treated as submitted in that timezone.
• If the datetime has no timezone set, the date is treated as submitted in the capture point’s timezone.
The time format includes the timezone designator and the time without milliseconds, separated by a
T
:
(yyyy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ssZZ).
For example:
2008-07-21T21:00:00+01:00
If this property is not selected ( timezoneIsSupplied
=
OFF
), then:
• If the timezone is present in the datetime string, it is ignored, and the datetime is treated as submitted in capture point’s timezone
XML File Capture Point
The XML File Capture Point is an iWD service for capturing tasks from XML files. The XML files can be formatted according to the standard iWD XML
message schema (described in detail in “iWD Messages” on page 225
) or in a custom XML format.
To handle custom XML formats, two transformation scripts must be created: one for input transformation, and one for output. iWD currently supports the
Groovy scripting language for these purposes. For more information on transformation scripts, see the standard iWD input and output transformation scripts that are included in the iWD core package.
These transformation scripts are enabled if you import the
iwd_transform.xml
file into the iWD
System or managed tenant. The
iwd_transform.xml
file is installed when you install the iWD Manager installation package, in the
config
directory. For example, at
C:\Program Files\GCTI\iWD Manager\config
.
Deployment Guide 159
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 25 are configurable for the XML File
Capture Point.
Table 25: XML File Capture Point Properties
Properties
startAutomatically logLevel checkIfAlreadyCaptured timezone defaultMediaType defaultTaskExpirationInDays interactionServerConnector threads idleSleepTimeSeconds emergencySleepThreshold
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise
instructed by Genesys Technical Support. See “Service Log Levels” on page 152
for a description of each log level. Depending on the setting of this property, additional logging properties might be
available. Refer to “Logging Service” on page 152
for descriptions of these common properties.
If true, iWD will verify whether another task that has a given captureId
already has been captured.
The time zone of the XML File Capture Point. Date/time values will be converted from the specified time zone to UTC, before those values are stored in iWD. Also, any date/time values that are included in response XML files will be converted to the specified time zone. If this parameter is not specified, it defaults to the tenant time zone.
The media type attribute that will be assigned to tasks captured by the capture point.
The list of available media types is retrieved dynamically from
Configuration Server. In Configuration Server itself, the media type attribute is configured as a type of Business Attribute. The default media type used by the capture point may be overwritten if it is specified in the
<mediaType>
attribute in the
<CreateTask>
message.
The default task expiration date. All tasks that are captured by this capture point will expire after the specified amount of days. This value can be overridden by explicitly specifying the task expirationDateTime
attribute in the capture data.
Mandatory dependency: The Interaction Server Connector service
) that should be used for connectivity to the Interaction
Server.
Performance tuning: The size of the thread pool.
Service-idle period when there are no more tasks to process.
Exception handling: Once distribution attempts fail the specified number of times, processing will be held.
160 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 25: XML File Capture Point Properties (Continued)
Properties
emergencySleepSeconds incomingFileDirectory capturedFileDirectory completedFileDirectory rejectedFileDirectory errorFileDirectory
TransformScriptingService
TransformInputScript
TransformOutputScript
TransformOutputRootNode backupFor
Description
Exception handling: Specifies how long to hold processing after emergencySleepThreshold
failed distribution attempts.
The directory in which the XML File Capture Point looks for new files to capture.
The directory into which captured files are put.
The directory into which completed tasks are exported. Each task is exported to an xml file with the naming convention
<interaction id>.xml
.
The directory into which rejected tasks are exported. Each task is exported to an xml file with the naming convention
<interaction id>.xml
.
The directory into which files that contain errors are placed.
Optional dependency: Scripting Service (see
XML input/output will be transformed using input/output transformation scripts.
The input transformation script; must be specified when
TransformScriptingService
is selected.
The output transformation script; must be specified when
TransformScriptingService
is selected.
The name of the XML root node in output files.
High Availability:
The primary XML File Capture Point in a high availability setup scenario. This service will perform a backup role in such a setup, and will take over processing if the primary service becomes unavailable.
Database Capture Point
The Database Capture Point is an asynchronous capture point service that creates tasks in iWD, based on records in a database. As a task in iWD goes through its life cycle stages, the Database Capture Point allows you to make updates to the database, to mimic the task life cycle in the originating system.
The Database Capture Point allows execution of a certain database query or update statement, depending on the task state:
Deployment Guide 161
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
•
Capture—the Database Capture Point scans the result set that is returned from the originating database by a special “capture” query and creates tasks in iWD that are based on the information that is provided by each result-set record.
•
Captured—after the task is created in iWD, the Database Capture Point may execute a “captured” update query to update the respective database record and notify the originating system that the task for the respective row in the database has already been created.
•
Assigned—the task has been assigned to a user. The Database Capture
Point may execute an “assigned” update query to update the respective database record and notify the originating system that the iWD task for the respective row in the database has been assigned to the user.
•
Completed—the task has been completed by a user. The Database Capture
Point may execute a “completed” update query to update the respective database record and notify the originating system that the iWD task for the respective row in the database has been completed.
•
Restarted—the task has been restarted (that is, returned to the iWD for reprocessing and distribution at a later time). The Database Capture Point may execute a “restarted” update query to update the respective database record and notify the originating system that the iWD task for the respective row in the database has been restarted.
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 26 are configurable for the Database
Capture Point.
Table 26: Database Capture Point Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel checkIfAlreadyCaptured timezone
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise
setting of this property, additional logging properties might be
available. Refer to “Logging Service” on page 152
for descriptions of these common properties.
If true, iWD will verify whether another task that has a given captureId
already has been captured.
The time zone of the target database. Date/time values will be converted from the specified time zone to UTC, before those values are stored in the iWD. If this parameter is not specified, it defaults to the tenant time zone.
162 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 26: Database Capture Point Properties (Continued)
Property
defaultMediaType defaultTaskExpirationInDays interactionServerConnector threads idleSleepTimeSeconds emergencySleepThreshold emergencySleepSeconds jdbcDriver jdbcURL username password idField processIdField
Description
The media type attribute that will be assigned to tasks captured by the capture point.
The list of available media types is retrieved dynamically from
Configuration Server. In Configuration Server itself, the media type attribute is configured as a type of Business Attribute.
The core iWD attribute mediaType
may be specified in the
CreateTask message. If the mediaType
attribute is returned as a result of the query configured in captureQuerySQL
, then it will override the default mediaType
specified in the Database Capture Point service property defaultMediaType
.
The default task expiration date. All tasks that are captured by this capture point will expire after the specified amount of days. This value can be overridden by explicitly specifying the task expirationDateTime
attribute in the capture data.
Mandatory dependency: The Interaction Server Connector service
(see
page 154 ) that should be used for connectivity to the Interaction
Server.
Performance tuning: The size of the thread pool.
Service-idle period when there are no more tasks to process.
Exception handling: Once distribution attempts fail the specified number of times, processing will be held.
Exception handling: Specifies how long to hold processing after emergencySleepThreshold
failed distribution attempts.
The name of the JDBC driver class to access the database.
The URL of your JDBC connection. For information on how to construct a valid URL, see your JDBC driver documentation.
The name of the database user.
The password of the database user.
The name of the column that uniquely identifies the record in the result set that is returned by the database query that is specified in the captureQuerySql
parameter. The value of the field is mapped to the captureId
parameter in the consecutive update statements.
The name of the column that contains the process ID. If the value of this field matches a process ID in iWD, a process and department will be assigned to the task.
Deployment Guide 163
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 26: Database Capture Point Properties (Continued)
Property
fieldsToAttach captureQuerySql capturedUpdateSql errorUpdateSql assignedUpdateSql completedUpdateSql
Description
A list of fields that will be attached to task data. Multiple fields should be separated by a comma. This property also supports
*
and
?
wildcards.
For example: field1,field2,special*
This expression means that the fields that have the names field1
and field2
will be attached, as well as any field that has a name that starts with special
.
The database query that returns the result set in which each row will be captured as a task in iWD. The result set that is returned by this query must contain also the column that is specified in the idField parameter.
For example: s elect * from TABLE where STATUS=”new”
The database update statement that updates the database to reflect that certain data has already been captured as a task in iWD. The captureId
parameter can be used to reference the particular row.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS='captured' where idField=:captureId
The database update statement that updates the database to reflect that the associated task in iWD has been held by an error. The captureId parameter can be used to reference the particular row.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS='error' where idField=:captureId
The database update statement that updates the database to reflect that the associated task in iWD has been assigned. The captureId parameter can be used to reference the particular row. The userId parameter can be used to set the name of the user who is working on the task.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS='assigned', USER=:userId where idField=:captureId
The database update statement that updates the database to reflect that the associated task in iWD has been completed. The captureId parameter can be used to reference the particular row.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS='completed' where idField=:captureId
164 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 26: Database Capture Point Properties (Continued)
Property
canceledUpdateSql heldUpdateSql queuedUpdateSql errorHeldUpdateSql rejectedUpdateSql restartedUpdateSql
Description
The database update statement that updates the source database to reflect that the associated task in iWD has been canceled. The captureId
parameter can be used to reference the particular row.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS=’canceled’ where idField=:captureId
The database update statement that updates the source database to reflect that the associated task in iWD has been put on hold. The captureId
parameter can be used to reference the particular row.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS=’held’ where idField=:captureId
The database update statement that will be executed when a task, captured by the Database Capture Point, is queued.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS='queued' where idField=:captureId
The database update statement that updates the source database to reflect that the associated task in iWD has been put in an error held status due to an internal processing error. For example, a task may be put into an error held status if no Process is assigned to the task during the Classification phase of the rule execution. The captureId parameter can be used to reference the particular row.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS=’errorHeld’ where idField=:captureId
The database update statement that will be executed when a task, captured by the Database Capture Point, is rejected.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS='rejected' where idField=:captureId
The database update statement that updates the database to reflect that the associated task in iWD has been restarted in iWD. The captureId parameter can be used to reference the particular row.
For example: update TABLE set STATUS='restarted' where idField=:captureId
Deployment Guide 165
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 26: Database Capture Point Properties (Continued)
Property
updatedUpdateSql sourceUpdateQuerySql sourceUpdatedUpdateSql sourceErrorUpdateSql captureBatchSize sourceUpdateBatchSize
Description
The database update statement that updates specific attributes of a task in a special table in the source database when a task has been updated in iWD. The captureId
parameter can be used to reference the particular row.
For example: update UPDATE_TABLE set PRIORITY=:priority where idField=:captureId
The database query that fetches a set of rows, where each row represents an update request coming from the source system. Each such update request may contain one or more columns that represent task attributes. The name of the column represents the name of the task attribute, but the value is the new value of that attribute.
For example: select id, channel, category, by businessValue from
UPDATE_TABLE where processed='F'; id channel category businessValue
-------------------------------------
1 fax new 200
2 e-mail new 150
The database update (or delete) query that will execute against a special table in the source database to mark a particular update as having been processed.
For example: update UPDATE_TABLE set processed=’T’ where idField=:captureId
This update is executed when there is an error executing an update request (the one that is fetched by sourceUpdateQuerySql
). For example, if the task can not be found, then sourceErrorUpdateSql
is executed and the error parameter is set to
Cannot update task with captureId=<taskId>: task not found
.
Performance tuning:
The maximum number of rows that are to be returned by the query specified in the captureQuerySql
parameter. A value of
0
sets the
JDBC driver default value.
Performance tuning:
The maximum number of rows that are to be returned by the query specified in the sourceUpdateQuerySql
parameter. A value of
0
sets the JDBC driver default value.
166 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 26: Database Capture Point Properties (Continued)
Property
backupFor validateConnection validationQuery
Description
High Availability:
The primary Database Capture Point in a high availability setup scenario. This service will perform a backup role in such a setup, and will take over processing if the primary service becomes unavailable.
Enables and disables the validation of the connection to the capture database.
Enables a query to determine if the connection to the capture database is active. The default query works with Oracle databases. For other database servers, Genesys recommends that you use a query that returns at least one row. This is important because if your query returns zero rows the validation will fail. If you do have a query that returns zero rows, Genesys recommends that you complete the following steps:
1. Create an additional
TABLE
in your database that contains one integer field and one row.
2. Run the following statement: select
*
from
<THAT_TABLE>
.
Note that the validationQuery
property will only be visible once you select (check) the validateConnection
property.
Rules Service
The Rules Service is a mandatory iWD service that allows iWD services to execute various rules.
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 27 are configurable for the Rules
Service.
Table 27: Rules Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise
setting of this property, additional logging properties might be
available. Refer to “Logging Service” on page 152
for descriptions of these common properties.
Deployment Guide 167
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Business Context Management Service
The Business Context Management service is a mandatory service that works in conjunction with the Rules service to enable business rules to be invoked from within routing strategies:
•
The Business Context Management service invokes the Rules service to execute rules for a particular interaction based on the ESP (Business
Context Management Service) method that has been requested
•
The Rules service executes rules, updates interaction attached data and passes this information back to Business Context Management Service and
Interaction Server .
The Business Context Management
Application
is created by the iWD Setup
Utility. The Business Context Management service needs to be created manually in iWD Manager.
Note:
Refer to
page 221 for information about configuring multiple
Business Context Management Services.
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 28 are configurable for this service.
Table 28: Business Context Management Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel
CMEApplicationName configurationServerConnector
RulesService
Description
Whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless
otherwise instructed by Genesys Technical Support. See “Service
for a description of each log level.
Depending on the setting of this property, additional logging
properties might be available. Refer to “Logging Service” on page 152
for descriptions of these common properties.
The name of the corresponding application in the Configuration database. This application was created by using the iWD Setup
Utility. Refer to Procedure: Using the iWD Setup Utility, on page 69
.
Mandatory dependency: The Configuration Server Connector service (see
page 168 ); provides access to the Configuration Server.
Mandatory dependency: The Rules service (see page 167
) that is used to execute business rules.
168 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 28: Business Context Management Service Properties (Continued)
Property
workerThreads maxPriority
Description
Performance tuning:
The size of the thread pool.
The maximum priority that can be assigned to a task. The priority will be automatically limited to this value if it exceeds it.
Database Service
The Database Service provides a connection to a database server. A typical iWD solution has one defined database connection for historical reporting data
(iWD Data Mart).
The configured database and user must exist in the database server. The user must have read/write permissions to the database.
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 29 are configurable for the Database
Service.
Table 29: Database Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel
DatabaseType
ServerName
MysqlServerPort
SQLServerCustomURL
SqlServerJDBCURL
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless
otherwise instructed by Genesys Technical Support. See “Service
Log Levels” on page 152 for a description of each log level.
Depending on the setting of this property, additional logging
The type of the database server. Refer to the Genesys Supported
Operating Environment Reference Manual for supported databases.
The host name of the database server.
The TCP port of the MySQL database server. This is available only when the
DatabaseType
is
MySQL
.
If selected, the connection is configured by specifying a custom MS
SQ JDBC URL. This option is available only when the
DatabaseType
is
MS SQL Server
.
The JDBC connection URL for MS SQL. This option is available when
SqlServerCustomURL
is selected.
Deployment Guide 169
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 29: Database Service Properties (Continued)
Property
SqlServerPort
DatabaseName
OracleCustomURL
OracleJDBCURL
OracleServerPort
OracleSID
Username
Password
AutoSynchronize
Description
The TCP port of the MS SQL database server. This option is available only when the
DatabaseType
is
MS SQL Server
.
The name of the database. This is available only when the
DatabaseType
is
MS SQL Server
or
MySQL
.
If this is checked, the connection is configured by specifying a custom Oracle JDBC URL. This option is available only when the
DatabaseType
is
Oracle
.
The JDBC connection URL for Oracle. This option is available when
OracleCustomURL
is selected.
The TCP port of the Oracle database server. This option is available only when the
DatabaseType
is
Oracle
.
Oracle System ID of the database. The Oracle System ID (SID) is used to uniquely identify a particular database on a system.
The database user name.
The password for the database.
If selected, iWD will try to initialize/upgrade database structure automatically.
Statistics Adapter
The iWD Extended Statistics Service that existed in 7.6.1 has been merged into the Statistics Adapter service.
The Statistics Adapter Service processes the statistical data created by the
Aggregate Stats ETL job and writes stat-types and filters in the configuration for Genesys Stat Server. CCPulse+ requests iWD statistics from Stat Server, and reads the stat-types and filters from the Stat Server configuration.
170 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 30 are configurable for the Statistics
Adapter Service.
Table 30: Statistics Adapter Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel triggerMode
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless
otherwise instructed by Genesys Technical Support. See “Service
for a description of each log level.
Depending on the setting of this property, additional logging
How the ETL job will be triggered (started):
•
Trigger using CRON expression
: Starts a job automatically, based on a CRON scheduling expression.
•
Trigger after another scheduled service
: Starts a job automatically after another scheduled job has finished.
•
Trigger manually
: Job can be started manually via the iWD
Manager Services Status screen (see Figure 52 on page 139
).
triggerMode and startAutomatically
The startAutomatically
property controls whether the service will be started at all. If it is unchecked, the service will not start on any of these trigger events.
You can still start the service manually from the Service Status screen. In that case, the particular service will be in a wait state. It will wait for the trigger event to happen in order to start.
Notes: If the triggerMode
is set to
Trigger manually
and startAutomatically
is unchecked, after deployment when you start the service it will be started, but it will wait for a manual trigger, so you will need to start it again so it can perform its tasks.
If startAutomatically
is checked and the triggerMode
is set to
Trigger using CRON expression
, the service will start according to the CRON expression.
Deployment Guide 171
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 30: Statistics Adapter Service Properties (Continued)
Property
cronExpression executionQueueName dimensionMapping datamartDatabase virtualQueueName configurationServerConnector
CMETenantName statServerName
Description
Standard CRON scheduling expression when triggerMode
is set to
Trigger using CRON expression
. For example, the following expression will cause the job to be executed every 15 minutes:
0 0,15,30,45 * * * ?
See http://www.quartz-scheduler.org/docs/tutorials/crontrigger.
html
for more information.
The execution queue is configured only for jobs that are triggered with a cron expression or triggered manually.
For chained jobs (
Trigger after another scheduled service
), the execution queue automatically assumes the value of the parent job.
For example, if you have Load Intraday chained to Load Config and
Aggregate Intraday chained to Load Intraday, Load Config will never start while Aggregate Intraday is still running.
Scheduled services that have the same executionQueueName
will never be run in parallel within the same solution.
If a scheduled service is triggered while another scheduled service that has the same executionQueueName
is in progress, it will be queued until the other service has completed its processing.
Note: This only works within the boundaries of a single runtime node. If you have services on different nodes, this will have no effect across the nodes.
Defines how statistical dimensions are mapped.
Filter
: Dimensions are mapped to CCPulse+ filters.
Virtual
Queue: Dimensions are mapped to Genesys virtual queues.
A reference to the Database service (see page 169
) that points to the iWD Data Mart database.
Name of the Genesys virtual queue to which statistics are distributed.
A reference to the Configuration Server Connector (see
); provides connectivity to Configuration Server.
The name of the (Genesys Configuration Server) tenant in which the
Stat Server application is defined.
The name of the Stat Server application.
172 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 30: Statistics Adapter Service Properties (Continued)
Property
serviceIndex extensionSectionName extensionFileName
Description
Statistical service index for configuration options. This should be unique inside the set of indexes, assigned to statistical services served by the one instance of Genesys Stat Server.
Required to support a Genesys reporting environment with multiple instances of Stat Server Java Extensions. This property maps to the section name for the specific Stat Server Java Extension in Stat
Server configuration.
Required to support a Genesys reporting environment with multiple instances of Stat Server Java Extensions. This is the name of the Stat
Server Java extension jar file (
BPR_iWD_Extension.jar
). This file was saved to the Stat Server installation directory during installation of the iWD Stat Extensions. You can find the location of this file in
Stat Server configuration options as the value of the java-libraries-dir option in the java-config
section.
Data Mart ETL Services
The Data Mart ETL services enable batch loading and aggregation of data into the iWD Data Mart. The Kettle ETL service defines general ETL configuration, such as the database in which the aggregated data will be stored.
The Scheduled ETL Job service defines execution characteristics (such as scheduling) for each specific ETL job.
Kettle ETL Service
The Kettle ETL service represents an embedded Kettle ETL Engine that runs
ETL scripts for loading and aggregating task and configuration data into the iWD Data Mart.
Deployment Guide 173
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 31 are configurable for the Kettle ETL
service.
Table 31: Kettle ETL Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel repositoryDirectory customTaskAttributeMapping
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless
otherwise instructed by Genesys Technical Support. See “Service
for a description of each log level.
Depending on the setting of this property, additional logging
The directory on the server in which iWD Data Mart ETL scripts are stored. For example, the default path used when iWD Data
Mart is installed is
C:\Program Files\GCTI\iWD Data Mart\etl.
Up to 10 comma-separated names of a task's custom attributes that will be loaded into
task_fact
custom attribute fields
(
CUSTOM_ATTRIBUTE1-10
). Names must start with a letters, and only underscores and alphanumeric characters are supported.
In order for Kettle to pick them up, it is necessary to create fields in the Event Log Database. In the rpt_interaction
and rpt_esp tables, add the fields in the following format:
Name: <attribute_name>, type: varchar(length)
.
These fields should be added to the mappings in the Event Log
DAP options in the esp-custom-data and
itx-custom-data sections.
For example, in order to store a custom attribute with the name order_total
in the iWD Data Mart, as a task custom attribute:
1. Create a new column in the rpt_interaction table: order_total
, type: varchar(50)
2. Create a new column in the rpt_esp table: order_total
, type: varchar(50)
3. Create a new option in the esp-custom-data
section of the
Event Log DAP options: order_total=order_total
4. Create a new entry option in the itx-custom-data section of the Event Log DAP options: order_total=order_total
5. Add order_total
to Kettle ETL service’s customTaskAttributeMapping
attribute list
174 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 31: Kettle ETL Service Properties (Continued)
Property
customTaskDimensionMapping
Description
Up to 5 comma-separated names of a task's custom attributes that will be loaded into the
CUSTOM_DIM dimension and associated to the task via the
CUSTOM_DIM_KEY
field. Names must start with a letters, and only underscores and alphanumeric characters are supported.
In order for Kettle to pick them up, it is necessary to create fields in the Event Log Database. In the rpt_interaction and rpt_esp tables, add the fields in the following format:
Name: <attribute_name>, type: varchar(length)
.
These fields should be added to the mappings in the Event Log
DAP options in the esp-custom-data and
itx-custom-data sections.
For example, in order to store a custom attribute with the name order_total
in the iWD Data Mart, as a task custom attribute:
1. Create a new column in the rpt_interaction table: order_total
, type: varchar(50)
2. Create a new column in the rpt_esp table: order_total
, type: varchar(50)
3. Create a new option in the esp-custom-data
section of the
Event Log DAP options: order_total=order_total
4. Create a new entry option in the itx-custom-data section of the Event Log DAP options: order_total=order_tota l
5. Add order_total
to Kettle ETL service’s customTaskDimensionMapping
attribute list customTenantAttributeMapping Up to 5 comma-separated names of a tenant's custom attributes that will be loaded into the
CUSTOM_DIM
dimension and associated to the tenant via the
CUSTOM_DIM_KEY
field.
customDepartmentAttributeMapping Up to 5 comma-separated names of a department’s custom attributes that will be loaded into the CUSTOM_DIM dimension and associated to the contract via the
CUSTOM_DIM_KEY
field.
customProcessAttributeMapping detailsExpirationDays aggregation15minExpirationDays
Up to 5 comma-separated names of a process's custom attributes that will be loaded into the
CUSTOM_DIM
dimension and associated to the process via the
CUSTOM_DIM_KEY
field.
The number of days after which the detailed task (t ask_fact, task_event_fact,
and task_work_fact
) data will be removed from the database.
The number of days after which the data will be removed from
15 minute aggregation tables.
Deployment Guide 175
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 31: Kettle ETL Service Properties (Continued)
Property
datamartDatabase statisticsAdapter timeZone
Description
Mandatory dependency: Database (see
load and aggregate reportable data (Data Mart).
Optional dependency: Statistics Adapter service (see
to use for the delivery of statistics for current-intraday reporting.
The time zone that will be used to store all date/time information in the fact tables.
Scheduled ETL Job
In addition to the options and actions described in “Service Details” on page 140
, the properties listed in
Table 32 are configurable for the Scheduled
ETL Job service.
Table 32: Scheduled ETL Job Service Properties
Properties
startAutomatically logLevel
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise
setting of this property, additional logging properties might be
available. Refer to “Logging Service” on page 152
for descriptions of these common properties.
176 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 32: Scheduled ETL Job Service Properties (Continued)
Properties
triggerMode cronExpression
Description
How the ETL job will be triggered (started):
•
Trigger using CRON expression
: Starts a job automatically, based on a CRON scheduling expression.
•
Trigger after other scheduled service
: Starts a job automatically after another scheduled job has finished.
•
Trigger manually
: Job can be started manually via the iWD
Manager Services Status screen (see Figure 52 on page 139 ).
triggerMode and startAutomatically
The startAutomatically
property controls whether the service will be started at all. If it is unchecked, the service will not start on any of these trigger events.
You can still start the service manually from the Service Status screen.
In that case, the particular service will be in a wait state. It will wait for the trigger event to happen in order to start.
Notes: If the triggerMode
is set to
Trigger manually
and startAutomatically
is unchecked, after deployment when you start the service it will be started, but it will wait for a manual trigger, so you will need to start it again so it can perform its tasks.
If startAutomatically
is checked and the triggerMode
is set to
Trigger using CRON expression
, the service will start according to the CRON expression.
Standard CRON scheduling expression when triggerMode is set to
Trigger using CRON expression
. For example, the following expression will cause the job to be executed every 15 minutes:
0 0,15,30,45 * * * ?
See http://www.quartz-scheduler.org/docs/tutorials/crontrigger.
html
for more information.
Deployment Guide 177
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Table 32: Scheduled ETL Job Service Properties (Continued)
Properties
executionQueueName etlService jobName
Description
The execution queue is configured only for jobs that are triggered with a cron expression or triggered manually.
For chained jobs (
Trigger after another scheduled service
), the execution queue automatically assumes the value of the parent job.
For example, if you have Load Intraday chained to Load Config and
Aggregate Intraday chained to Load Intraday, Load Config will never start while Aggregate Intraday is still running.
Scheduled services that have the same executionQueueName
will never be run in parallel within the same solution.
If a scheduled service is triggered while another scheduled service that has the same executionQueueName
is in progress, it will be queued until the other service has completed its processing.
Note: This only works within the boundaries of a single runtime node. If you have services on different nodes, this will have no effect across the nodes.
Mandatory dependency: The Kettle ETL Service (see
The name (type) of the ETL job. See Table 18, “Preconfigured ETL
Jobs,” on page 148 for descriptions of the various types of iWD Data
Mart ETL jobs. Additional information can be found in the iWD 8.0
Data Mart Reference Guide.
Configuration of iWD Current-Day Statistics in CCPulse+
This section explains how to configure iWD current-day statistics in
CCPulse+. This section contains the following procedures:
•
Procedure: Configuring CCPulse+ for iWD
•
Procedure: Creating a CCPulse+ template, on page 179
Procedure:
Configuring CCPulse+ for iWD
Purpose: In Genesys, iWD current-day statistic measure types are presented as statistic objects, and iWD statistic dimensions are defined as filters. Therefore, it is necessary to combine statistic objects with filters in order to get a measure type for a dimension.
178 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Prerequisites
•
The iWD Data Mart database has been created, and the corresponding
Database service has been configured and is running.
•
The Aggregate Statistics ETL job is configured and running.
•
Stat Server must be running, with the iWD Stat Extensions installed.
•
The Statistics Adapter service must be configured and running.
Start of procedure
1. Start CCPulse+, and connect to the Genesys Stat Server (
File > New
).
2. In the
Object Types
dialog box, select the
Virtual Queue
object type for the corresponding Genesys tenant and switch, and click
Next
.
3. In the
Object Instances dialog box, select the virtual queue that is used by the iWD to submit statistics, and click
Finish
.
Note:
This is the virtual queue that was specified in Procedure: Using the iWD Setup Utility, on page 69 .
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
To be able to view iWD current-day statistics in Genesys CCPulse+, it is necessary to create a CCPulse+ template. The following procedure explains how to create a CCPulse+ template.
Procedure:
Creating a CCPulse+ template
Purpose: To create a CCPulse+ template to use to view iWD current-day statistics.
Start of procedure
1. Open the CCPulse+ template wizard by selecting
Template Wizard... from the Tools menu..
2. In the
Template Definition
dialog box, select the
Virtual Queue
object type in the Available Object Types list, then select the Create New
Template
option, and click
Next
.
3. In the Pre-defined Statistics dialog box, enter the template name, then click the
New Group
button, and enter a name for the newly created statistic group.
Deployment Guide 179
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
4. Expand the
TotalCustomValue stat type in
Available Statistics
tree view, and select the iWD statistic that you want to add to the template (all iWD statistic names have a “GTL” prefix).
5. Click the
>>
button to add the selected statistic to the newly created statistic group.
6. In the
Requested Statistics
tree view, select the newly added statistic, and then click the
Properties
button.
7. In the
Statistic Properties
dialog box enter
Alias
(which is how the statistic is displayed in CCPulse+). Set
Insensitivity Value
to
1
; set
Interval Type
to
Selection and GTLAggregated
; set
Notification Mode
to
Changes Based
; and set
Filter
to the filter type that represents the required iWD dimension; and then click
OK
..
8. Add more statistics and statistic groups, if necessary, and then click the
Next
button.
9. In the
Graph
dialog box, adjust graph parameters, if necessary, and then click
Finish
.
10. In the CCPulse+ main window, select the virtual queue instance that is used by the iWD to submit statistics. Create a real-time view for this virtual queue:
In the Real-Time Data Template dialog box, select the previously created template from the list, and click
OK
.
End of procedure
Workforce Management Connector Service
The Workforce Management Connector Service allows you to use objects that exist in the WFM database, such as:
•
Business Units and Sites that belong to Business Units
•
Multi-Site Activities configured under Business Units
•
Activities configured under Sites.
In order to use this service, an
Application
must be configured in
Configuration Server.
Procedure:
Configuring iWD to work with WFM
Purpose: To configure the Workforce Management Connector Service in iWD
Manager, and add a connection to the WFM Server.
180 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration iWD Services
Prerequisites
•
Workforce Management is installed and configured, as described in the
Workforce Management 8.0 Administrator’s Guide.
•
The attributeFilterExclude
property of the Interaction Server Connector service should contain the
WFM Activity
parameter (see Table 22 on page 155
for a list of the Interaction Server Connector service’s properties).
Start of procedure
1. Login to Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator.
2. Locate the iWD Manager
Application
object and open its properties.
3. On the
Connections
tab, add a connection to the WFM Server application and save the change.
4. Login to iWD Manager.
5. Configure the corresponding Service in iWD Manager. Refer to “Service
Details” on page 140 for the common service options.
lists the additional configurable properties for the Workforce Management
Connector Service.
6. Once the service is configured, WFM objects can be used in iWD.
7. In Departments and Processes, select any Capture Point, Department or
Process, and add the action
Assign WFM Activity
. This action has two drop-down boxes. The first one contains Business Units and Sites, and the second one contains Multi-Site Activities and Activities.
8. If WFM Server is running, a list of Business Units and Sites for which the current user has permissions, is shown.
9. Select any Business Unit or Site.
10. Select a Multi-Site Activity or Activity from the second drop-down box.
11. When a task is generated you can see BU (or Site) in the
WFMContext attribute and Multi-Site Activity (or Activity) in the
WFMActivity
attribute in the task’s properties.
End of procedure
Deployment Guide 181
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Table 33: Workforce Management Connector Service Properties
Property
startAutomatically logLevel
CMEApplicationName configurationServerConnector
Description
Indicates whether the service should be started automatically after the configuration deployment.
The Service log level. This should be set to
Default
unless otherwise instructed by Genesys Technical Support. See
“Service Log Levels” on page 152
for a description of each log level. Depending on the setting of this property, additional
logging properties might be available. Refer to “Logging
for descriptions of these common properties.
The name of the WFM Server as configured in Configuration
Manager or Genesys Administrator. This is the WFM Server that was added to the
Connections tab of your iWD Manager application.
Mandatory dependency: The Configuration Server Connector
); provides access to the Configuration
Server.
Warning!
When any changes are made to the WFM Connector Service
(including creation of the service), the Undeployed Changes message does not appear in the Header bar. The changes do have to be deployed in order to take affect, so be sure to deploy your changes.
Departments and Processes
The Departments and Process configuration section is used to configure iWD business logic.
•
Use Department Details view (see page 183
) to create new departments, and to view and modify general department attributes and contract-level
Metrics (see
).
•
Use Process Details view (see
) to create new processes, and to view and modify general process attributes and process-level Metrics (see
).
•
Use Rules view (see page 191 ) to create, view, and modify iWD business
rules.
182 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
•
Use Global Rules (ss
page 192 ) to create, view, and modify global business
rules.
•
Use Business Calendars view (see page 203
) to create, view, and modify iWD business calendars.
•
Use Deployment view (see page 205 ) to deploy solution configurations.
Department Details
Department Details view displays, and lets you modify, general department
attributes. Refer to “Departments and Processes” on page 182
for more information about departments.
shows the Department Details view.
Figure 57: Department Details
Deployment Guide 183
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
lists the attributes and actions that are available in the Department
Details view.
Table 34: Department Details Attributes and Actions
Attribute/Action
ID
Department Name
Start Date
End Date
Description
Contact Name, Phone and E-Mail
Metrics
Custom Attributes
Save/Save & Close/Cancel/Delete
View Tasks
Description
The ID of the department.
The name of the department. This field is mandatory.
The date on which the department becomes active.
The last day that the department is active. If left empty, the period end date is unconstrained (that is, the department will be active infinitely).
A free-form description of the department.
The contact information for the department, for informational purposes.
A set of user-defined metrics, for reporting purposes (described
).
A set of user-defined attributes, for informational and reporting purposes. Each attribute must have a name, type (either
Text,
Number, Currency,
or
Date
), value, and optional description.
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Opens a corresponding task view in iWD Manager.
184 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Process Details
Process Details view displays, and lets you modify, general process attributes.
Refer to “Departments and Processes” on page 182
for more information about
processes. Figure 58 shows the Process Details view.
Figure 58: Process Details
lists the attributes and actions that are available in Process Details view.
Table 35: Process Attributes and Actions
Attribute/Action
ID
Process Name
Start Date
Description
The ID of the process.
The name of the process. This field is mandatory.
The date on which the process becomes active.
Deployment Guide 185
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Table 35: Process Attributes and Actions (Continued)
Attribute/Action
End Date
Description
Contact Name, Phone and E-Mail
Metrics
Custom Attributes
Save/Save & Close/Cancel/Delete
View Tasks
Description
The last day that the process is active. If left empty, the period end date is unconstrained (that is, the process will be active infinitely).
A free-form description of the process.
The contact information for the process, for informational purposes.
A set of user-defined metrics, for reporting purposes (described
).
A set of user-defined attributes for informational and reporting purposes. Each attribute must have a name, a type (either
Text,
Number, Currency,
or
Date
), a value and an optional description.
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “Object
.
Opens a corresponding task view in iWD Manager.
Business Calendars
A business calendar is a set of rules that define working days and hours, as well as holidays, that are applicable for the business. Business calendars can be used in iWD rules to perform date and time calculations, taking into account the working schedule of the business. Business calendars are defined on a solution level and can be used in rules only for that particular solution.
Managing Business Calendars in iWD Manager
To create new (or to manage existing) business calendars, open Departments &
Processes view in iWD Manager, and select the Business Calendars entry in
186 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes the tree on the left-hand side of iWD Manager.
a solution’s business calendars.
Figure 59: List of Solution's Business Calendars
The right-hand side of iWD Manager is split horizontally into two panes. The upper displays a list of a solution's business calendars. The
New Business
Calendar
button that is underneath this list is used to create a new business calendar. You can delete business calendars by clicking the delete button that is on the right-hand side of the business calendar in the business calendar list.
When a calendar in the business calendar list is selected, the lower pane displays the attributes of the selected business calendar.
shows an example of the attributes of a business calendar.
Figure 60: Attributes of a Business Calendar
Deployment Guide 187
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Business calendars consist of a set of standard mandatory attributes, as well as
optional business calendar rules. Table 36 describes the standard attributes of a
business calendar.
Table 36: Business Calendar Attributes
Attribute name Description
ID The business calendar identifier. This attribute is generated automatically by iWD Manager when the calendar is created.
Name
Timezone
Week starts on
Week ends on
Start time
End time
The name of the business calendar as it will appear throughout iWD Manager.
The time zone of the business calendar.
The first day of a working week.
The last day of a working week.
The start time of a working day. This attribute is a representation of time in 24-hour format (hh:mm, where
hh are hours and mm are minutes).
The end time of a working day. This attribute is a representation of time in 24-hour format (hh:mm, where
hh are hours and mm are minutes).
Business calendar rules describe exceptions to the regular working schedule that is defined by business calendar standard attributes. It is possible to add and delete business calendar rules by clicking the and icons located on the right side of the business calendar rule list. Depending on calendar placement
188 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes and entry type, the definition of a business calendar rule can have different
attributes. Table 37 describes the attributes of a business calendar rule.
Table 37: Business Calendar Rule Attributes
Attribute Description
Name
Entry type
The name of the business calendar rule.
The type of business calendar rule. This can be one of the following:
Holiday
: The business calendar rule describes a holiday.
Time Change
: The business calendar rule describes working hours that differ from the working hours of the business calendar.
Note: A business calendar's holidays precede time changes; therefore, if any rule sets a day as a holiday, and there is a time change for that specific day, the time change will have no effect. This applies only to holidays that are specified by the rules of the business calendar.
Calendar placement The calendar placement of the business calendar rule. This can be one of the following:
Fixed
: The business calendar rule is tied to a specific date.
Relative
: The business calendar rule is described in a relative way and is not tied to a specific date; for example, the first Monday of September would be a relative description.
Annual
: The business calendar rule that happens every year on a specific date.
Deployment Guide 189
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Table 37: Business Calendar Rule Attributes (Continued)
Attribute
Definition
Description
The contents of this attribute depend on the selected calendar placement and entry type:
Date input control
: This parameter applies only to business calendar rules that have a fixed calendar placement. The year portion of this date is not taken into account, when performing calculations; thus, making this date recurrent on yearly basis.
Relative calendar placement controls
: This set of controls applies only to business calendar rules that have a relative calendar placement. There are three drop down list controls that allow specification of Place in month,
Day of week, and Month of year. Place in month is defined by a value of
Every, First, Second, Third,
or
Fourth,
and is used in conjunction with
Day of week
(Monday, Tuesday, and so on) to describe relatively the day of month. Month of year defines to what month a business calendar applies; besides month names, it allows also specification of “ any month
,” if the business calendar rule must be recurrent on a monthly basis. The following are examples of definitions of a relative calendar placement:
[Second] [Tuesday] of [September]
[Every][Saturday] of [May]
[First][Monday] of [any month]
Annual calendar placement controls
: This set of controls applies only to business-calendar rules that have an annual calendar placement. There are two dropdown list controls that allow specification of month and date.
Working hours definition controls
: This set of controls applies only to business calendar rules that have a time-change type. Two input controls allow the entering of a start time and end time of the working day. Each value is a representation of time in 24-hour format (hh:mm, where
hh are hours and mm are minutes).
190 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Simple example
The following procedure explains how to configure a simple business calendar.
Procedure:
Configuring a business calendar
Purpose: To configure a business calendar in which Monday-Friday are standard working days 09:00 to 18:00, Saturday 10:00 to 16:00.
Start of procedure
1. Create a new calendar, select
Timezone
, and set
Week starts on Monday
and
Week ends on Friday . Then, set Start time and End time .
2. Add a time-change rule for Saturdays (it will mark it as working day).
3. Some holidays can be specified with rules, such as Christmas or New
Year's Day. See
.
End of procedure
Rules
Figure 61: Example Business Calendar
In iWD Manager, when a department, process, capture point, or global rule is selected in the navigation tree, the rules for that particular context are shown on the right side of iWD Manager, under the Rules tab. Rules are presented in a list, in the same order as they are applied to tasks. You can change the order of rules by clicking the Up and Down buttons. The logic of a particular rule can be expressed as either a linear rule or a decision table.
Any interaction attribute can be read or updated by business rule conditions and actions, respectively.
Deployment Guide 191
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Global Rules
iWD 8.0 supports “Global Rules”. Global business rules allow you to specify classification and prioritization rules for the entire iWD Solution. They provide:
•
the ability to configure classification rules globally instead of per Capture
Point.
•
the ability to configure prioritization rules globally instead of per
Department or Process.
•
support for tasks (interactions) not captured by iWD Capture Points. This includes Genesys as well as third-party media servers, such as Genesys
E-mail Server, G+ Adapters, and custom integrations previously built using Open Media API.
Global rules are applied before any other rules. This means that for classification, the sequence is:
1. Global rules
2. Capture point rules
3. Department rules
4. Process rules
Note:
Any of these steps are optional. However after Step 3 a process has to be assigned, otherwise the task status will be changed to
ERROR_HELD
.
For example, a department can be assigned in a global rule or capture point rule, followed by assigning a process at the department level.
Alternatively, a process may be directly assigned in a global rule or capture point rule. If a department or process is assigned in both global and capture point rules based on the same conditions, the capture point rules will override.
For prioritization the sequence is:
1. Global rules
2. Department rules
3. Process rules
Linear Rule
A linear rule is a business rule that has a set of conditions (when) and actions
(then), and is used for a simple (linear) business case. For example, when a
192 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
task is due in 1 to 8 hours, set the task's priority to 20. Figure 62 shows an
example.
Figure 62: Linear Rule
The following procedure explains how to specify a linear rule.
Procedure:
Specifying a linear rule
Purpose: To specify a linear rule for a simple business case.
Start of procedure
1. In iWD Manager, in the
Department & Processes
navigation tree, select a department, process, capture point, or global rule.
2. On the right side of iWD Manager, in the
Rules
tab, click
New Linear Rule
.
3. In the rule Name, enter a name that identifies the rule.
4. Select the Phase in which to apply the rule. Depending on the current context (capture point, department, process, or global rule) this can be either classification, prioritization, or archiving.
5. If needed, set the
Start Date
and
End Date
.
Leaving these empty means that the rule activation period is unconstrained.
Deployment Guide 193
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
6. Select one or several conditions for the rule from the
Add condition
combo box.
Conditions are logically concatenated by using the logical
AND
function.
Note:
Available actions and conditions are defined in Rules templates. If a new action or condition type is required, add it to either an existing rules template or a new template.
7. Select one or several actions for the rule from the
Add action
combo box.
8. To save the specified rule, click either
Save
or
Save & Close
.
End of procedure
Decision Table
Decision tables have a set of the same conditions (when) and actions (then), but have different parameters and are used for a complex (structured) business case.
Use decision tables to avoid dozens of linear rules in the system. Defining a decision table is similar to defining a linear rule. The following procedure explains how to define a decision table.
Procedure:
Defining a decision table
Purpose: To define a decision table for a complex business case.
Start of procedure
1. In the Rules tab, click New Decision Table .
2. Specify the rule
Name, Phase, Start Date,
and
End Date,
as required (in the same way as for a linear rule).
3. Click the add rule icon, and then enter the name of the rule.
4. Select one or several conditions for the rule from the
Add condition
combo box. For each selected condition, set the parameter value.
5. Select one or several actions for the rule from the
Add action
combo box.
For each selected action, set the parameter value.
6. To delete condition, action, or rule, click the Delete icon, which is located on the right side of the column (for conditions and actions), or on the right side of the row (for rules).
194 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
7. Repeat
Steps 3 through 5 , until you have set all of the required cases. The
result is a table in which the columns represent rule conditions and actions and the rows contain real conditions and action parameter values.
shows an example.
Figure 63: Decision Table
8. To save the specified rule, click either
Save
or
Save & Close
.
End of procedure
Standard Rules Template
The Standard Rules Template defines the most commonly used rule conditions, actions, parameters, and functions..
Note:
The ACME sample (see
) contains sample business rules that show how some of the Standard Rules Template conditions and actions can be used in practice. This includes assigning a task to an iWD process based on specific attributes of the task such as Product
Type, as well as setting priority and business value based on the iWD process. The sample also includes examples of how to set the reprioritization interval in a rule.
Deployment Guide 195
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Conditions
describes conditions for the Standard Rules Template.
Table 38: Standard Rules Template Conditions
Condition
Business value is
“from” to “to”
Explanation
If the business value of the task is between from and to, then...
Note: This rule condition is designed to test inclusive conditions. That is, the “from” and “to” conditions that are being checked are “>=” and “
<=
”, respectively. This must be understood in order to use this rule condition effectively.
Due Time is in
“from” to “to”
“units”
Priority is
“operator”
“priority”
If the task due date/time is between from and to specified time units, then...
Note: This rule condition is designed to test conditions that are not inclusive. That is, the “from” and “to” conditions that are being checked are “>” and “
<
”, respectively. This must be understood in order to use this rule condition effectively.
If iWD priority of the task is equal to/not equal to/less than/less than or equal to/greater than/greater than or equal to
value, then...
Channel is
“channel”
Department is
“department”
If the specified channel of the task is channel, then...
If the specified department of the task is department, then...
Integer “attribute”
“operator”
“integerValue”
When the value of a specified custom attribute of type integer
is greater than/less than/equal to
the specified integerValue, then...
Is first prioritization When the rules being applied are part of the initial prioritization step (the value of the task attribute reprioritizeDateTime
is empty), then…
Is reprioritization When the rules being applied are part of the reprioritization step (the value of the task attribute reprioritizeDateTime
is not empty), then…
Media type is
“mediaType”
When the specified media type of the task is mediaType, then...
196 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Table 38: Standard Rules Template Conditions (Continued)
Condition Explanation
String “attribute” equals
“stringValue”
When the value of a specified custom attribute of type string
is equal to the specified stringValue, then…
No process selected If process is not assigned to the task, then..
Process is “process” If the task is assigned to process, then...
Task is overdue When the task is overdue, then...
Actions
describes Standard Rules Template actions.
Table 39: Standard Rules Template Actions
Action
Activate task in
“amount” “units”
Explanation
Activate the task in the specified amount of time units.
Activate task in
“amount” working
“units”
Activate the task in the specified amount of time units according to the task's business calendar (working days, working hours and so on).
Note: Business calendar must be assigned to the task before this action can be used.
Archive destination
“archive”
Set the archive destination for the task.
Assign business calendar “business
calendar”
Assign the specified business calendar to the task.
Assign distribution point “distribution
point”
Assign the specified distribution point to the task.
Assign iWD department
“department”
Assign the task to the specified department.
Assign iWD process “process”
Assign the task to the specified process.
Deployment Guide 197
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Table 39: Standard Rules Template Actions (Continued)
Action
Assign WFM
Activity
“wfmActivity”
Increase iWD priority “amount”
Multiply business value “amount”
Reprioritize after
“period”
“periodType”
Explanation
Assign the task to the specified Genesys Workforce
Management Activity.
Note: For iWD to read objects from Genesys Workforce
Management, the Workforce Management Connector
) must be configured.
Increase the iWD priority of the task by the specified
amount.
Multiply the business value of the task by the specified
amount.
Reapply prioritization rules to the task after the specified
amount of time units from the current time.
Reprioritize after
“period” working
“periodType”
Reapply prioritization rules to the task after the specified amount of time units, according to the task's business calendar (working days, working hours, and so on).
Note: Business calendar must be assigned to the task before this action can be used.
Request a specific agent for the task.
Request agent
“agent”
Request skill
“skill”
Request a specific skill for the task.
Request agent group
“agentGroup”
Specify which agent group is required to process the task.
Request place group
“placeGroup”
Specify which place group is required to process the task.
Set activation date from
“customAttribute”
Set the activation date/time of the task from the specified
custom attribute of the task.
Set activation time
“time”
Set the time when the task will be activated.
Set business value of the task to the specified value.
Set business value
“businessValue”
Set due date from
“customAttribute”
Set the due date/time of the task from the specified
custom attribute of the task.
198 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Table 39: Standard Rules Template Actions (Continued)
Action Explanation
Set due time “time” Set the time when the task is due.
Set integer
“attribute” value
“integerValue”
Set priority
“priority”
Set string
“attribute” value
“stringValue”
Task Due in
“period”
“periodType”
Set the value of a specified custom attribute of type integer
to the specified integerValue.
Set the iWD priority of the task to the specified value.
Set the value of a specified custom attribute of type string
The task is due in, after the specified amount of time
units.
to the specified stringValue.
Task Due in
“period” working
“periodType”
The task is due in, after the specified amount of time units, according to the task's business calendar (working days, working hours, and so on).
Note: A business calendar must be assigned to the task before this action can be used.
Sets the task’s expiration date/time after the specified
amount of time units.
Task expires in
“period”
“periodType”
Task expires in
“period” working
“periodType”
Sets the task’s expiration date/time after the specified
amount of time units, according to the task’s business calendar (working days, working hours, and so on).
Note: A business calendar must be assigned to the task before you can use this action.
Parameters
Parameters in a Rules template describe the nature of the parameters that are used in rule conditions and actions. This includes how parameters are presented to the user (who is creating the rule), how input is validated, and so on.
Deployment Guide 199
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
describes parameters for the Standard Rules Template.
Table 40: Rules Template Parameters
Parameter
periodType periodTypeBC businessValue period priority process
Description
Presents you with predefined types of time periods, such as days, hours or minutes.
Presents you with predefined types of time periods used in business calendars, such as working days, working hours, or working minutes.
Allows you to enter the numeric value that represents business value.
Allows you to enter the numeric value. Combined with the period type, it gives the actual value of the time period.
Allows you to enter the numeric value that represents iWD priority.
Presents you with a list of processes that are defined in the solution. This list is dynamic; it changes as processes get added or removed.
periodFrom periodTo customAttribute
Allows you to enter the numeric value that represents the start point of a period, in time units, according to period type.
Allows you to enter the numeric value that represents the end point of a period, in time units, according to period type.
Allows you to enter text that represents the name of a task custom attribute.
skill Presents you with a list of skills that are read from the
Genesys configuration database. This list is dynamic; it changes as skills get added or removed.
businessCalendar Presents you with a list of business calendars that are defined in the solution. This list is dynamic; it changes as business calendars get added or removed.
wfmActivity mediaType
The associated WFM activity.
The media type.
200 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Table 40: Rules Template Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
operator department taskChannels agent agentGroup placeGroup distributionPoint integerValue stringValue attribute archive
Description
Provides operators Equal To, Not Equal To, Less Than,
Less Than or Equal To, Greater Than, and Greater Than
or Equal To, that can be used to compare values of custom attributes of type integer, to values specified in a rule condition.
Presents you with a list of departments that are defined in the solution. This list is dynamic; it changes as processes are added or removed.
Presents you with a list of predefined task channels, read from an iWD Lookup Table.
Presents you with a list of agents’ user names that are read from the Genesys configuration database. This list is dynamic; it changes as agents are added or removed.
Presents you with a list of Agent Groups that are read from the Genesys configuration database. This list is dynamic; it changes as agents are added or removed.
Presents you with a list of Place Groups that are read from the Genesys configuration database. This list is dynamic; it changes as agents are added or removed.
Presents you with a list of distribution points that are defined in the solution. This list is dynamic; it changes as entries in distributionPoint
lookup table are added or removed.
Allows you to enter an integer value for use in rule conditions or actions that evaluate the value of tasks custom attributes.
Allows you to enter a string value for use in rule conditions or actions that evaluate the value of tasks custom attributes.
Allows you to enter text that represents the name of a task attribute.
Presents you with a list of possible archive destinations for expired tasks.
Deployment Guide 201
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Functions
describes functions for the Standard Rules Template.
Table 41: Rules Template Functions
Function
getCurrentDT getPeriodDTFrom setDepartmentAndProcess isProcess setTime getDueDT compareInteger setIntValue getIntValue setStringValue getStringValue increaseIntegerValue multiplyIntegerValue getDTValue setDTValue notNull isNull getWFMActivityContext getWFMActivity
Description
Returns the current date and time, in UTC.
Adds the specified amount of time units (minutes, hours, days) to the specified date/time value.
Sets the department and process of the given task from a given string, in department|process format.
Is true if a given task is assigned to a given process, false otherwise.
Sets the time portion of a given date/time value from a string value, in hh:mm format.
Returns the task due date or throws an exception if a due date is not set.
Compares the value of two integers.
Sets the value of a task attribute as an integer.
Gets the value of a task attribute as an integer.
Sets the value of a task attribute as a string.
Gets the value of a task attribute as a string.
Increases the value of an integer by adding to it.
Increases the value of an integer by multiplying it by some factor.
Gets the value of a task attribute as date/time.
Sets the value of a task attribute as date/time.
Is true if a task attribute value is Not Null, false otherwise.
Is true if a given task attribute value is Null, false otherwise.
Retrieves WFM Activity context (Business Unit or Site).
Retrieves WFM Activity.
202 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration
Metrics
Departments and Processes
A key component of dashboards and reports is the comparison of actual metrics against target goals. Understanding the effectiveness or efficiency of organizations requires measuring performance against important goals that have been set by the organization.
Targets can be associated with a number of objects in iWD Manager, such as processes, departments, or tenants. For example, a work-time goal for a task will differ, based on its process; for example, orders will take longer than address changes.
shows an example.
Figure 64: Metrics
Metrics can be configured at the business-user level for departments and processes using metric types that are defined in available Metrics templates
(see “Metrics Templates” on page 135
). When a metrics value is set, it will be stored as a named attribute in Data Mart. If the value is changed, the updates are pushed through to Data Mart with a
valid_from and valid_to
date/time stamp. This is important for historical reporting; example, if you update the target on November 1 from 2.5 to 3.5, all tasks up to November 1 will use 2.5, and all new tasks will use 3.5.
If the value is set at a department level, it applies to all processes, unless there is a specific value for that process. For example, Department 1 has four processes: A, B, C, and D. Cost/Task @ Department 1 = 2.50, which applies to
Processes B, C, and D. Cost/Task @ Process A = 1.50, which applies only to
Process A.
Using business calendars in iWD rules
After business calendars are defined, it is possible to use them in iWD rules.
Business calendars should be assigned to a task before any business calendar related calculations can be performed on task values.
describes the
Deployment Guide 203
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes business calendar-related actions that are available in the Standard Rules
Template.
Table 42: iWD Rules Actions
Action
Assign business calendar
Reprioritize after
Task Due in
Parameters Description
{businessCalendar} Assigns a business calendar to a task. A business calendar must be assigned to a task, before any business calendar-related calculations can be performed on task values. A dropdown list displays a list of business calendars that are defined for the solution.
{period} working {periodType} Sets a task's re-prioritization date/time to value that is calculated, based on current date/time, the task's business calendar, and specified parameters.
{period} is a numeric value, and
{periodType} specifies “working” minutes, hours, or days.
{period} working {periodType} Sets a task's due date/time to a value that is calculated, based on the task's creation date/time, the task's business calendar, and specified parameters.
{period}
is a numeric value, and
{periodType}
specifies
“working” minutes, hours, or days.
204 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
Table 42: iWD Rules Actions (Continued)
Action
Activate task in
Task expires in
Parameters Description
{period} working {periodType} Sets a task’s activation date/time to a value that is calculated, based on task’s creation date/time, the task’s business calendar, and specified parameters.
{period}
is a numeric value, and
{periodType}
specifies
“working” minutes, hours, or days.
{period} working {periodType} Sets a task’s expiration date/time to a value that is calculated, based on task’s creation date/time, the task’s business calendar, and specified parameters.
{period}
is a numeric value, and
{periodType}
specifies
“working” minutes, hours, or days.
In addition to these standard rule actions that use business calendars, you may build other rule expressions that use business calendar functions. For more details, see https://sites.google.com/a/iwdlab.com/iwd8/rules/bc.
Deployment
Deployment in the Departments and Processes configuration section is identical to Deployment in the Services configuration section. Refer to
“Deployment” on page 143 for more information.
Solution User Access
Departments and processes support instance-level security. The User Access page under Solution allows the assignment of configured User roles to specific departments or processes. Any roles that have been specified on a department level are automatically inherited by all child processes. Process roles are appended to inherited ones.
Deployment Guide 205
Chapter 4: Configuration Departments and Processes
User access can be copied to another solution, if there are departments or processes that have matching IDs.
Note:
This user access only pertains to access to iWD business context elements, through iWD Manager. It does not relate directly to Genesys
Configuration Access Groups or other Configuration Server object permissions.
206 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter
5
iWD Manager and Task
Management
This chapter describes how to monitor and manage tasks in intelligent
Workload Distribution (iWD).
This chapter contains the following section:
Task Management
Task Management allows monitoring and management of tasks that are being processed by iWD:
•
Use Task Monitoring (see page 207 ) to view a list of tasks that are
associated with different business contexts, as well as details and history for each task.
•
Use Task Operation (see
) to override configured task-handling logic by performing a manual task operations on specific tasks such as
Hold, Resume, Cancel, and Modify.
•
Use Filters (see page 215 ) to refine the list of tasks that are available in
Task Monitoring by defining filter criteria and visible task attributes
(columns).
Task Monitoring
Task Monitoring allows you to view a current list of tasks for a number of business contexts:
•
Solution
•
Department
Deployment Guide 207
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
•
Process
•
Capture Point
All of the available contexts are displayed in the navigation tree, as shown in
. When a context is selected, the corresponding list of tasks is displayed in the Global Task List.
Figure 65: Navigation Tree
208 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
Global Task List
The Task List displays a list of tasks for the selected business context, as
illustrated below in Figure 66 .
Figure 66: Global Task List
lists the actions that are available in the Global Task List.
Table 43: Global Task List Actions
Attribute/Action Description
Filter
Advanced Filters
Refines the Global Task List and displayed columns, based on the selected filter. For more information on
filters, see “Filters” on page 215
.
Advanced filters let you further narrow down the tasks that are listed in the Global Task List. Up to three additional conditions can be added to a selected filter. All of the task’s core and extended attributes are available. To add an advanced filter, select the attribute name from the drop down list. Advanced filters cannot be saved and are retained only during an iWD Manager session.
Refresh Refreshes the Global Task List.
Deployment Guide 209
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
Table 43: Global Task List Actions (Continued)
Attribute/Action Description
Hold, Resume,
Cancel, Modify,
Export to XML
Configuration
Click task row
Performs the corresponding operation on the selected task.
The task is selected if the first column of the task row in the list is checked. To select/deselect all tasks in the list, click the first column in the table header. If no task is checked, but task details are opened for some task, this task is also considered to be selected. For more
information on specific operations, see “Task Operations” on page 213 .
Opens the configuration view of the current business context. This action can be restricted by a security policy.
Displays task details. The selected row is marked as
Task Details
When a task is selected from the Global Task List, its attributes will be
displayed. Figure 67 shows an example of the Task Details.
Figure 67: Task Details
Attributes are broken down into three sections:
•
Top—core task attributes
•
Middle—extended task attributes (displayed only when the task has extended attributes)
210 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
•
Bottom—custom task attributes. These attributes can be filtered by configuring the attributeFilterInclude
and attributeFilterExclude
properties of the Interaction Server Connector service (see page 154
).
For attributes that display a timestamp such as Task Due D/T , it is possible to view the offset from the current time by moving the mouse cursor on top of the attribute. The offset is displayed in a hint.
Task History
Task History can be viewed by clicking the History tab in the Task Details view. It displays all of the events that are related to the task that has been selected in the Global Task List.
lists the attributes and actions that are available in the Task History.
Table 44: Task History Attributes
Attribute/Action Description
Date/Time The date/time when the event occurred.
Actor Shows who triggered the event. This is empty for iWD system-triggered events.
Deployment Guide 211
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
Table 44: Task History Attributes (Continued)
Attribute/Action Description
Event Code Represents the type of the event:
NEW
: Task has just been created.
CLASSIFY_START
: Task classification has started.
CLASSIFY
: Task classification has finished.
PRIORITIZE_START
: Task initial prioritization has started.
PRIORITIZE
: Task initial prioritization has finished.
HOLD
: Task is held. This can be triggered by the task source system or by the user with the task Held operation
(see
RESUME
: Task is resumed from the held state. This can be triggered by the task source system or by the user with the
task Resume operation (see page 213
).
REJECT
: Task was rejected. Either the contract or the process to which the task was associated is expired or not yet active.
ERROR
: A processing error has occurred, and the task was held for that reason.
UPDATE
: Task attributes are updated. This can be triggered by a task source system or based on updates to a task’s attached data from a routing strategy or Genesys
Interaction Server client such as an agent or knowledge worker’s desktop application.
UPDATE_COMPLETE
: Task attributes are updated after a task is completed.
ASSIGN
: Task is assigned to an agent.
FINISH
: Agent has finished working on the task.
FINISH_RETURN
: Agent has returned the task to queue.
STOPPED
: That task has stopped (removed from database).
COMPLETE
: Task is completed.
QUEUE : The task is queued.
DISTRIBUTE_QUEUE
: The task is put into a queue.
DISTRIBUTE_WORKBIN
: The task is put into to a workbin.
REPRIORITIZE
: Task reprioritization has finished.
Event A formatted description of the event.
212 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
Task Operations
Task operations provide the ability to override manually the configured task-handling business logic. Task operations are performed on the selected
task, as described in “Task Monitoring” on page 207 .
Hold Tasks
The Hold Tasks operation holds the selected task, so that no further processing is performed on a task until it is resumed by the Resume Tasks operation.
When a task is held, it will not be reprioritized, distributed, or assigned to an agent.
Resume Tasks
The Resume Tasks operation resumes processing of a held task. Only held tasks can be resumed.
Cancel Tasks
The Cancel Tasks operation permanently cancels processing of the selected task. A task cannot be canceled if it is has been completed, canceled, or rejected. A task can be canceled if it is already in an Assigned state. The task can be canceled by a source system (through an iWD capture adapter) or by a user through iWD Manager's Global Task List view.
Deployment Guide 213
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
Modify Tasks
The Modify Tasks operation allows an update of a number of task attributes
and, optionally a restart of the task. Figure 68 shows an example.
Figure 68: Modify Task
An attribute will be updated only if the check box that is next to it is checked; it will be checked automatically if a value of the corresponding field has changed. If the task is also restarted, its status is set to New , and it is classified and prioritized again in the same way as a new task.
Example—Save & Restart
Consider the following use case: a task is assigned to a Process, but that
Process has a start date that is in the future. In this scenario, the task is placed into the iWD_Rejected
queue. How can this task be re-initiated once the start date of the Process has been reached? In order to re-initiate processing of this task, you must perform a
Save & Restart
in the Global Task List. Processing of the task will not re-initiate automatically.
Select one or more tasks in the Global Task List and click on the
Modify
button.
At the bottom of the screen, click
Save & Restart
. You do not have to modify any attributes. The result is that the interaction (task) will be placed back into the iWD_New
queue in the iWD business process.
This
Save & Restart
action might be taken if the task is in the
Rejected
status, or potentially for other business reasons where the task should be treated as if it has just been captured.
214 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
Export Tasks to XML
The Export Tasks to XML operation exports all selected tasks from the Global
Task List to an XML file. The XML file will contain all of the available attributes for each task in the standard iWD format.
Once it has been exported, a task from an XML file can be imported into a third-party application (such as Microsoft Office Excel) for further analysis and processing.
The setUpdateTrigger Function in URS
The URS setUpdateTrigger
function can be used in the Distribution routing strategy prior to the task (interaction) going to the Target block. Then, while the task (interaction) is in the Target block waiting to be routed to an agent, if the Priority attribute is modified through the Global Task List, the internal queue in URS will take this new priority into account. Refer to the Universal
Routing 8.0 Reference Manual for more information about this function.
Note:
The setUpdateTrigger
function was introduced in URS 8.0.1.
Filters
Filters allow you to refine the list of tasks that are displayed in the Global Task
List. Each filter is defined by a set of filter criteria (optional) and table columns
that will be displayed in the Global Task List. Figure 69 shows an example.
Deployment Guide
Figure 69: Filters
215
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
lists the attributes and actions that are available in Filters view.
Table 45: Filter Attributes
Attribute/Action Description
Name
Public
Filter Criteria
The name of the filter.
Whether the filter will be available to all users (checked) or only the current user (unchecked).
Tasks that do not match the defined criteria will be excluded from the Global Task List when the filter is selected. New criteria conditions can be added by selecting them from the
Select criteria to add drop-down. Some criteria conditions are parameterized; for such conditions, parameters can be configured directly in a criteria table (such as status for “Status is ...” criteria).
Table Columns The Global Task List will display these columns when the filter is selected. Columns can be added, removed, and reordered.
Save, Save & Close,
Cancel, Delete
Standard iWD Manager functions as described in “iWD
Manager Overview” on page 97 .
Search by Attributes that are not Displayed in the
Advanced Filter
This section provides some examples how to search by attributes that are not displayed in the Advanced filter by default.
Scenario
You want to filter by an attribute that does not already appear as a column in the interactions
database table. In this case, the data is being held in BLOB format in the flexible_properties column in the database table, but you can add a new column to represent this attribute.
For example, you are submitting tasks through the XML File Capture Adapter, and your messages contain a custom data tag with the key
<myCity>
which is used to send a customer’s city to iWD as part of the task. You want to be able to search for tasks in the Global Task List based on the customer’s city.
Your XML file looks something like this:
<GTLMessages>
<CreateTask>
…
<Data>
<myCity>Calgary</myCity>
216 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
…
</Data>
</CreateTask>
</GTLMessages>
You need to do two things in order to enable filtering by this custom attribute.
1. Add a new column to the Interaction Server database interactions
table, giving it a meaningful name that you want to see in the Global Task List’s
Advanced filter drop-down list, such as
City
. Save the change to the database.
2. In Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, add a new
Interaction Custom Property.
This is a type of Business Attribute. You can find this by going into Configuration Manager or Genesys
Administrator. Under your Tenant, go to Business Attributes and look at the Attribute Values of the Interaction Custom Property object. The value of the
Name
property on the
General
tab is important; it must be the same as the key of your custom attribute. In this example it would be myCity
. On the
Annex
tab, the value of the translate-to
option in the translation section must exactly match the name of the database column you added in
.
3. Restart Interaction Server.
4. Restart your web application server (such as Tomcat) if it is already running.
5. You should now see your new attribute name in the Advanced filter drop-down list.
Note:
Refer to “Task Attributes and Interaction Properties” on page 245 for
more information about task attributes and interaction properties that can be used for Filtering in the Global Task List.
Deployment Guide 217
Chapter 5: iWD Manager and Task Management Task Management
218 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter
6
High Availability
This chapter describes high-availability and redundancy in iWD. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Configuring Multiple Business Context Management Services, page 221
Deploying Services on Multiple Runtime Nodes, page 222
Interaction Server Redundancy, page 223
Redundancy
A redundant service configuration maintains application availability by eliminating all single points of failure within the application itself. iWD provides the option of distributed deployment across logical and physical servers to minimize single points of hardware or OS/application-service software failures.
illustrates this configuration.
Deployment Guide 219
Chapter 6: High Availability Redundancy
Figure 70: Distributed Deployment with Centralized Management
In addition to this distributed architecture, a redundant solution typically comprises two services:
•
A primary service that runs during normal operations
•
A backup service that supports the primary service in case of failure, with a failover mechanism that ensures that the backup will take over from the primary service in case of service failure.
High Availability for iWD Components
In iWD 8.0, the iWD Capture Points support hot standby.
Redundancy Support Matrix for iWD Services
lists intelligent Workload Distribution services and their supported redundancy mode or modes:
Table 46: Redundancy Support Matrix iWD Service
WebSphere MQ Capture
XML Capture
Redundancy Support
Hot Standby
Hot Standby
220 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 6: High Availability Configuring Multiple Business Context Management Services
Table 46: Redundancy Support Matrix (Continued) iWD Service
Database Capture iWD Data Mart ETL
Web Service Capture Point
Business Context Management Service
Redundancy Support
Hot Standby
N/A
N/A
N/A (configured in the Configuration Management environment)
Configuring Multiple Business Context
Management Services
It is possible to configure multiple Business Context Management Services
(BCMS) for purposes of high availability or load balancing.
It is important to remember that from a Genesys Configuration Server perspective, the BCMS is a “Third Party Server” to which Interaction Server establishes a connection in order to process requests that will be passed to the iWD rule engine. Interaction Server manages the connection to the BCMS, and how it passes on requests to the BCMS depends on several factors, which will differ depending on the goal of the configuration. The first option is a primary/backup configuration. The second option is a load balancing configuration.
Primary/Backup Configuration
You may configure multiple BCMS in a primary/backup mode. On the BCMS applications themselves (the applications defined in Configuration Server, not the services configured through iWD Manager), you will configure one as primary and one as backup. They can be on the same host or on different hosts, but the ports must be different. On the
Connections
tab of the Interaction
Server application you will only specify the primary BCMS.
On the
External Service
blocks in your routing strategies, where the BCMS external service is invoked, you should list the name of your BCMS
application that is serving as the primary. See also “Business Context
Management Service” on page 168
and “Configuration of List Objects” on page 252
.
You will also need to configure two BCMS services in iWD, each of which will correspond to one of the applications defined in Configuration Server.
Deployment Guide 221
Chapter 6: High Availability Deploying Services on Multiple Runtime Nodes
Load Balancing Configuration
In this scenario, you do not configure the BCMS applications as primary/backup. Configure your two BCMS applications as an “application cluster”. You do this by creating a new Third Party application in
Configuration Server of type ApplicationCluster (the application template is on the Interaction Management CD and must be imported first). When you create the application, give it a meaningful name such as
BCMS_Cluster_1
.
Because you need to define different BCMS applications for each Solution in iWD, it is recommended to number the application clusters or use some other nomenclature so you can understand the correlation. In the
Connections
tab of this
ApplicationCluster
object you will add connections to your two (or more)
BCMS applications. In the
Connections
tab of your Interaction Server, add a connection to this ApplicationCluster .
Now, in the List Object (see “Configuration of List Objects” on page 252
) where the correspondence between the BCMS application names and the iWD
Solution IDs is defined, instead of using an actual BCMS application name, you will use the name of your application cluster, such as BCMS_Cluster_1 .
You will not have to change the default logic in the
IWDBP
business process, because the routing strategies will use that List Object to retrieve the name of the ESP application based on the iWD Solution ID. In this case, it will retrieve the name of the
ApplicationCluster
application, which will instruct Interaction
Server to use the two BCMS applications under that cluster when making requests to the external service.
Note:
Refer to the eServices (Multimedia) 8.0 User’s Guide for more information about using Application Clusters for high availability of
ESP Servers.
ESP Object in Interaction Routing Designer
If you do not have the option in IRD to select an application cluster in the ESP object, you can update the options for your IRD application. In the default section, add an option named tools-tuneup
and set the value to extended
.
Restart IRD.
Deploying Services on Multiple Runtime
Nodes
A Solution’s services can be deployed on multiple runtime nodes. For example:
•
“Backup” services should be deployed on a separate runtime node from
“Primary” services.
222 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Chapter 6: High Availability Interaction Server Redundancy
•
Data Mart-related services should be deployed on yet another runtime node, separate from the backup and primary services
The following procedure provides deployment steps for installing and configuring multiple Runtime Nodes.
Procedure:
Deploying Services on multiple Runtime Nodes
Purpose: To install and configure multiple Runtime Nodes in your environment.
Start of procedure
1. Install additional Application Server(s) (for example, additional instances of Tomcat).
2. Run the iWD Runtime Node setup on every Application Server.
3. Add additional Runtime Node application(s) in Configuration Manager or
Genesys Administrator that map to each installed Runtime Node.
4. Add Runtime Node(s) in iWD Manager for each installed Runtime Node.
5. Install the following components, specifying the specific iWD Runtime
Node to which you are deploying them:
•
iWD Rules
•
iWD Capture
•
iWD Data Mart
6. When deploying for backup purposes rather than partitioning purposes, you must run the install of iWD Rules and iWD Capture twice; once against each Runtime Node (you cannot install iWD Data Mart against two
Runtime Nodes).
End of procedure
Next Steps
•
Configure iWD Services in iWD Manager, specifying the desired Runtime
Node.
Interaction Server Redundancy
Refer to the eServices 8.0 User’s Guide for information about high-availability and redundancy supported by Interaction Server.
Deployment Guide 223
Chapter 6: High Availability Interaction Server Redundancy
224 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix
A
iWD Messages
This Appendix describes the messages that are supported in iWD 8.0.
It contains the following sections:
Task Attributes and Interaction Properties, page 245
Messages
This section provides a detailed description of all of the input and output iWD
Messages that are supported. The following information is documented for each message:
•
Direction—“In” or “Out”. All “In” messages come from the originating system and results in an “Out” message, unless the specific “Out” message is turned off in capture point configuration. “Out” messages are sent as responses to “In” messages, as well as notifications when the task state changes within iWD.
•
Description—a functional description of the message.
•
Format—the XML format of the message. This illustrates a structure of the
entire XML message, by using data types (see Table 47 on page 226 )
instead of node values.
•
Attributes—a description of each attribute that is used in the XML message.
•
Response messages—the response messages that this message can trigger.
Response messages are only applicable for messages that have an “In” direction.
•
Error codes—the error codes that this message can return by using the
“Error” message. Error codes are only applicable for messages that have an
“In” direction.
Deployment Guide 225
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
This Appendix also includes the section “Task Attributes and Interaction
Properties” on page 245 , which explains how task attributes are mapped to
interaction properties.
Note:
There is now an XML schema available for the iWD messages. It is available here: https://sites.google.com/a/iwdlab.com/iwd8/capture/schema
Data Types
describes the data types used in iWD messages.
Table 47: Data Types for iWD Messages
Type
Integer
String
Boolean
DateTime
Description
An integer value (-2
31
<value <2
31
).
A string value. The maximum length is specified in parentheses, where applicable.
A Boolean value ( true
or false
).
A date/time value. Date/time should be formatted according to the ISO 8601 standard
YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss
(for example 2007-08-26T21:32:00) and should be provided for the time zone that is configured for the given
Capture Point.
Task Action
Direction: In
Description: This section describes common attributes and responses for all inbound messages.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<ActionName>
<BrokerId>String</BrokerId> or <CaptureId>String(64)</CaptureId>
<Actor>String(255)</Actor>
<Reason>String(255)</Reason>
<ActionDateTime>DateTime</ActionDateTime>
[attributes specific to action]
</ActionName>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See
.
226 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Table 48: Attributes for Task Action Messages
Attribute
BrokerId
Description
The task’s interaction ID. This is a unique ID assigned by
Interaction Server.
CaptureId
Actor (optional)
The task’s ID in the originating system.
The user or system that triggered the message. This is a free-form text field that is used for auditing purposes and will be set to name of the capture point, if none is provided.
Reason (optional) The reason that the message was submitted. This is a free-form text field that is used for auditing purposes.
ActionDateTime
(optional)
The date/time when the action was triggered. This will be set to the current date/time that the message is processed, if none is provided.
Response messages: Action-specific response messages or error messages
Table 49: Error Codes for Task Action Messages
Error code
INVALID_FORMAT
TASK_NOT_FOUND
Description
The message is not formatted correctly.
The task that has the requested CaptureId or BrokerId is not found.
This error code can be triggered for all action messages, except for the
CreateTask message (see “CreateTask” on page 228
).
Task Notification
Direction: Out
Description: This section describes common attributes and responses for all outbound messages.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<[notification name]>
<BrokerId>String</BrokerId>
<CaptureId>String(64)</CaptureId>
<CapturePointId>String(16)</CapturePointId>
<DistributionPointId>String(16)</DistributionPointId>
<Actor>String(255)</Actor>
Deployment Guide 227
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
<Reason>String(255)</Reason>
<EventDateTime>DateTime</EventDateTime>
[attributes specific to notification]
</[notification name]>
</GTLMessages>
.
Table 50: Attributes for Task Notification Messages
Attribute
BrokerId
Description
The task’s interaction ID. This is a unique ID assigned to the task by Interaction Server.
The task’s ID in the originating system.
CaptureId
CapturePointId The service ID of the capture point by which the task was captured.
DistributionPointId This attribute is provided for backward compatibility.
Actor The user or system that triggered the notification.
Reason
EventDateTime
The reason for the notification.
The date/time when the notification was triggered.
CreateTask
Direction: In
Description: Creates a new task in iWD and populates it with the provided attributes. All attributes of this message are optional. Typically, most of the core task attributes, such as
ProcessId, Priority,
and
BusinessValue,
are calculated and assigned with the iWD rules and, therefore, should be left out.
Interaction Server assigns a unique Interaction ID for each task. Interaction
Server stores and maintains the IDs in the Interaction Server database.
Note:
In the
<CreateTask>
message for the Web Service Capture Point, the iWD core attribute createdDateTime is now mandatory, not optional.
The value can be null, however. The reason it has been changed from optional to mandatory is to support migration of tasks from iWD 7.6.1 to 8.0, where createdDateTime
would be populated during the redistribution of tasks from 7.6.1 to 8.0.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<CreateTask>
Standard action attributes, as documented in “Task Action” on page 226 ,
except for
BrokerId
.
228 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
<channel>String(32)</channel>
<mediaType> string(32) </mediaType>
<category>String(32)</category>
<activationDateTime>DateTime</activationDateTime>
<dueDateTime> DateTime </dueDateTime>
<expirationDateTime> DateTime </expirationDateTime>
<businessValue> Integer </businessValue>
<priority>Integer</priority>
<processId>String(16)</processId>
<Ext>
<customerID>String(64)</customerID>
<customerSegment> String(64)</customerSegment>
<productType> String(64)</productType>
<productSubtype> String(64)</productSubtype>
<resultCode> String(64)</resultCode>
<sourceFirstCreatedDateTime>DateTime</sourceFirstCreatedDateTime>
<sourceCreatedDateTime>DateTime</sourceCreatedDateTime>
<sourceDueDateTime>DateTime</sourceDueDateTime>
<sourceProcessType> String(64)</sourceProcessType>
<sourceProcessSubtype> String(64)</sourceProcessSubtype>
<sourceTenant> String(64)</sourceTenant>
</Ext>
<Data>
<CustomAttribute1> String(255)</CustomAttribute1>
...
</Data>
<Hold>Boolean</Hold>
</CreateTask>
</GTLMessages>
.
Table 51: Attributes for CreateTask Messages
Attribute
Hold
CaptureId
(optional) mediaType
Description
Whether to hold the task initially. If true, the task will be created with its initial status set to
NewHeld
and will not be processed further, until a subsequent
ResumeTask
message
).
If a
CaptureId
is not provided, it will be assigned to the same generated value as
BrokerId
.
If a media type is specified, it will override the default media type configured for the iWD Capture Point Service that is being used.
and “TaskInfo” on page 231 for the
description of the remaining attributes.
Response message:
TaskCreated
(see “TaskCreated” on page 230
).
Deployment Guide 229
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Table 52: Error Codes for CreateTask Messages
Error code
TASK_ALREADY_CAPTURED
Description
If the captures point’s checkIfAlreadyCaptured
flag is enabled, iWD will check whether a task that has a given captureId already exists in the database. If this is the case, the task will not be captured, and an error message that has the
TASK_ALREADY_CAPTURED code will be submitted to the
Outbound queue.
TaskCreated
Direction: Out
Description: The TaskCreated message is submitted as a response to the
CreateTask
message (see page 228 ) and indicates successful task creation.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskCreated>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227 .
</TaskCreated>
</GTLMessages>
Error
Direction: Out
Description: The
Error
message is submitted as a response to iWD request messages, indicating that the requested operation has failed.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<Error>
<Message>String</Message>
<Code>String</Code>
<Parameter>String</Parameter>
<Parameter>String</Parameter>
...
</Error>
</GTLMessages>
230 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
.
Table 53: Attributes for Error Messages
Attribute
Message
Code
Parameter
Description
The formatted error message.
The error code (string).
The error parameter. There can be zero, one, or multiple error parameters. The number of parameters is specific to each error code.
GetTaskInfo
Direction: In
Description: Request task details by the given task's capture ID or interaction
ID.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<GetTaskInfo>
Standard action attributes, as documented in “Task Action” on page 226 .
</GetTaskInfo>
</GTLMessages>
Response message: “TaskInfo” .
TaskInfo
Direction: Out
Description: The TaskInfo message is submitted as a response to the
GetTaskInfo
message (see “GetTaskInfo” on page 231 ) and provides detailed
information about the requested task.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskInfo>
Standard action attributes, as documented in “Task Action” on page 226 .
<tenantId>String(16)</tenantId>
<solutionId> String(16)</solutionId>
<DepartmentId> String(16)</DepartmentId>
<processId> String(16)</processId>
<channel>String(32)</channel>
<mediaType> String(32) </mediaType>
<category> String(32)</category>
<status> String(16)</status>
<businessCalendarId> String(16)</businessCalendarId>
<createdDateTime>DateTime</createdDateTime>
<heldDateTime>DateTime</heldDateTime>
Deployment Guide 231
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
<assignedDateTime>DateTime</assignedDateTime>
<completedDateTime>DateTime</completedDateTime>
<activationDateTime>DateTime</activationDateTime>
<dueDateTime>DateTime</dueDateTime>
<expirationDateTime>DateTime</expirationDateTime>
<priority>Integer</priority>
<reprioritizeDateTime>DateTime</reprioritizeDateTime>
<businessValue>Integer</businessValue>
<assignedToUser>String(64)</assignedToUser>
<Queue>String(255)</Queue>
<QueueType>String(16)</QueueType>
<QueueTarget>String(255)</QueueTarget>
<distributionPointId>
String(16)
</distributionPointId>
<Ext>
<customerID>String(64)</customerID>
<customerSegment> String(64)</customerSegment>
<productType> String(64)</productType>
<productSubtype> String(64)</productSubtype>
<resultCode> String(64)</resultCode>
<sourceFirstCreatedDateTime>DateTime</sourceFirstCreatedDateTime>
<sourceCreatedDateTime>DateTime</sourceCreatedDateTime>
<sourceDueDateTime>DateTime</sourceDueDateTime>
<sourceProcessType>String(64)</sourceProcessType>
<sourceProcessSubtype>String(64)</sourceProcessSubtype>
<sourceTenant>String(64)</sourceTenant>
<requestedAgent>String(64)</requestedAgent>
<requestedSkill>String(64)</requestedSkill>
<requestedAgentGroup>String(64)</requestedAgentGroup>
<requestedPlaceGroup>String(64)</requestedPlaceGroup>
</Ext>
<Data>
<customAttribute1> String(255)</customAttribute1>
...
</Data>
<TaskInfo>
<GTLMessages>
.
Table 54: Attributes for TaskInfo Messages
Attribute
tenantId solutionId
Description
The task’s tenant ID, as configured in iWD Manager, assigned as soon as the task is created. This attribute is submitted to the CIM
Platform with the
IWD_tenantId
key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
The tasks’s solution instance ID, as configured in iWD Manager, assigned as soon as the task is created. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_solutionId
key (even if it is excluded by a filter); updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
232 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Table 54: Attributes for TaskInfo Messages (Continued)
Attribute
DepartmentId processId channel category status businessCalendarId createdDateTime
Description
The tasks’s department ID, as configured in iWD Manager, assigned when the task’s process is identified either by iWD rules or explicitly by the task-originating system. This attribute is submitted to the CIM
Platform with the
IWD_DepartmentId
key; updates in the CIM
Platform are ignored.
The tasks’s process ID, as configured in iWD Manager, assigned when the task’s process is identified either by iWD rules or explicitly by the task-originating system. This attribute is submitted to the CIM
Platform with the
IWD_processId
key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
The task’s media channel—for example Fax, E-mail, or Webform.
This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_channel key; updates in the CIM Platform are picked up.
The task’s category—for example
Followup
. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_category
key; updates in the CIM Platform are picked up.
Task status:
New
—The task has just been created and will be processed.
Captured
—The task was processed, but it has not been prioritized.
Queued
—The task was processed and prioritized at least once.
Assigned
—The task is assigned to an agent.
Completed
—The task is completed.
Held
—The task is held and will not be reprioritized or distributed until it is resumed.
Error
—An error has occurred during task processing, prioritization, or distribution. Error details are stored in the custom extended task attribute
Error
. The task can be restarted, and iWD will attempt to process the task again.
Canceled
—The task is canceled.
Rejected
—The task was rejected during processing. This can occur when the task is assigned to an expired department or process.
The ID of the business calendar that is assigned to the task, as configured in iWD Manager.
Note: Maximum length is 16 characters
The date/time when the task has been created in iWD. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
ReceivedAt
key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
Deployment Guide 233
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Table 54: Attributes for TaskInfo Messages (Continued)
Attribute
heldDateTime assignedDateTime completedDateTime activationDateTime dueDateTime expirationDateTime priority reprioritizeDateTime businessValue assignedToUser
Queue
QueueType
Description
The date/time when the task has been held (set only when task status is either
Held
or
Error
).
The date/time when the task has been assigned.
The date/time when the task has been completed.
The date and time when the task becomes active; before that, it will stay queued and will not be reprioritized and distributed. If this is not set, the task becomes active instantly.
The date and time by which the task should be completed, according to the service-level agreement (SLA). This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_dueDateTime
key; updates within the
CIM Platform are picked up.
The date and time when the task expires and will be archived. Only tasks that have been
Canceled, Completed,
or
Rejected
are archived.
The task priority, which is an integer value that is used to order tasks.
The higher the value, the higher the task will stand in the queue and the sooner it will be routed. This attribute is submitted to the CIM
Platform with the
Priority
key; updates in the CIM Platform are picked up.
The date/time when the task should be reprioritized; if this is set to null
, no more reprioritization will be done. This value is normally updated during prioritization, based on rule expressions, such as
“Reprioritize in 5 minutes”.
The business value of the task. This attribute is submitted to the CIM
Platform with the
IWD_businessValue
key; updates in the CIM
Platform are picked up.
The user ID to which a task is assigned, as supplied by the CIM
Platform.
The distribution’s queue name.
The type of distribution queue:
InteractionQueue
AgentWorkbin
AgentGroupWorkbin
PlaceWorkbin
PlaceGroupWorkbin
234 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Table 54: Attributes for TaskInfo Messages (Continued)
Attribute
QueueTarget customerId distributionPointId customerSegment productType productSubtype resultCode sourceFirstCreatedDateTime sourceCreatedDateTime sourceDueDateTime sourceProcessType
Description
The queue target—for example,
Agent ID
, if the queue type is
AgentWorkbin
.
The customer’s ID. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_customerId
key; updates in the CIM Platform are picked up.
This attribute is provided for backward compatibility.
The customer’s segment or value. This attribute is submitted to the
CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_customerSegment
key; updates in the CIM Platform are picked up.
The related product—for example, DSL. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_productType
key; updates in the CIM Platform are picked up.
The subtype of the related product—for example, PremiumDSL.
This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_productSubtype
key; updates in the CIM Platform are picked up.
The task result code/outcome; typically, set by an agent in a softphone or another client application. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_resultCode
key; updates in the
CIM Platform are picked up.
The earliest timestamp of the task in the enterprise; it is applicable if there is another system, such as a fax server, that is used before the task originating system. This attribute is submitted to the CIM
Platform with the
IWD_ext_sourceFirstCreatedDateTimeTime
key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
The task-creation timestamp in the task-originating system. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_sourceCreatedDateTime
key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
The task-due timestamp in the task-originating system. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_sourceDueDateTime
key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
A related process in the task-originating system—for example:
Order. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_sourceProcessType
key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
Deployment Guide 235
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Table 54: Attributes for TaskInfo Messages (Continued)
Attribute
sourceProcessTypeSubtype sourceTenant requestedAgent requestedSkill data
Description
The subtype of the related process in the task-originating system.
This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_sourceProcessSubtype
key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
The tenant ID or name in the task-originating system. This attribute is submitted to the CIM Platform with the
IWD_ext_sourceTenant key; updates in the CIM Platform are ignored.
The agent requested for the task.
The skill requested for the task.
Custom task attributes. These attributes can be used to associate additional task originating system-specific data to the task that can be used in iWD rules, routing, and historical reporting.
UpdateTask
Direction: In
Description: Updates the attributes of the task that has the given task's capture
ID or interaction ID. This results in the interaction properties of the task being updated through the Genesys Interaction Server.
All attributes except for CaptureId and BrokerId are optional. If the attribute is not provided, it will not be updated.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<UpdateTask>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Action” on page 226
.
<category>String(32)</category>
<activationDateTime>DateTime</activationDateTime>
<dueDateTime> DateTime </dueDateTime>
<expirationDateTime> DateTime </expirationDateTime>
<businessValue>Integer</businessValue>
<priority>Integer</priority>
<ext>
<customerID>String(64)</customerID>
<customerSegment> String(64)</customerSegment>
<productType> String(64)</productType>
<productSubtype> String(64)</productSubtype>
<resultCode> String(64)</resultCode>
<sourceFirstCreatedDateTime>DateTime</sourceFirstCreatedDateTime>
<sourceCreatedDateTime>DateTime</sourceCreatedDateTime>
<sourceDueDateTime>DateTime</sourceDueDateTime>
236 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
<sourceProcessType> String(64)</sourceProcessType>
<sourceProcessSubtype> String(64)</sourceProcessSubtype>
<sourceTenant> String(64)</sourceTenant>
</ext>
<data>
<customAttribute1> String(255)</customAttribute1>
...
</data>
</UpdateTask>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes:
for a description of the attributes.
Response message: “TaskUpdated”
.
Note:
If you use UpdateTask to update a task’s priority, in order for that updated priority to be taken into account in your routing strategy you may want to use the URS function setUpdateTrigger
. By using this
URS function, if the
Priority
attribute of a task is updated—even while the task is in a Target block of a routing strategy waiting to be routed to an agent—the internal queue in URS will take this new priority into account. For more information about this function, refer to the Universal Routing 8.0 Reference Manual.
The setUpdateTrigger
function was introduced in URS 8.0.1.
TaskUpdated
Direction: Out
Description: The
TaskUpdated
message is submitted as a response to the
UpdateTask
message (see “UpdateTask” on page 236 ), as well as when the task
is updated either via the iWD Manager or within the CIM Platform.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskUpdated>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in“Task Notification” on page 227
.
<tenantId>String(16)</tenantId>
<solutionId> String(16)</solutionId>
<DepartmentId> String(16)</DepartmentId>
<processId> String(16)</processId>
<channel>String(32)</channel>
<mediaType> String(32) </mediaType>
<category> String(32)</category>
<status> String(16)</status>
<businessCalendarId> String(16)</businessCalendarId>
<createdDateTime>DateTime</createdDateTime>
<heldDateTime>DateTime</heldDateTime>
<assignedDateTime>DateTime</assignedDateTime>
<completedDateTime>DateTime</completedDateTime>
Deployment Guide 237
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
<activationDateTime>DateTime</activationDateTime>
<dueDateTime>DateTime</dueDateTime>
<expirationDateTime>DateTime</expirationDateTime>
<priority>Integer</priority>
<reprioritizeDateTime>DateTime</reprioritizeDateTime>
<businessValue>Integer</businessValue>
<assignedToUser>String(64)</assignedToUser>
<ext>
<customerID>String(64)</customerID>
<customerSegment> String(64)</customerSegment>
<productType> String(64)</productType>
<productSubtype> String(64)</productSubtype>
<resultCode> String(64)</resultCode>
<sourceFirstCreatedDateTime>DateTime</sourceFirstCreatedDateTime>
<sourceCreatedDateTime>DateTime</sourceCreatedDateTime>
<sourceDueDateTime>DateTime</sourceDueDateTime>
<sourceProcessType> String(64)</sourceProcessType>
<sourceProcessSubtype> String(64)</sourceProcessSubtype>
<sourceTenant> String(64)</sourceTenant>
</ext>
<data>
<customAttribute1> String(255)</customAttribute1>
...
</data>
<actor>String(255)</actor>
<TaskUpdated>
<GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Action” on page 226
for a description of the attributes.
TaskDistributedQueue
Direction: Out
Description: The
TaskDistributedQueue
message is submitted when the task is moved by the CIM Platform into any interaction queue or workbin, other than
Interaction Server's predefined queues and workbins reserved for iWD.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskDistributedQueue>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227 .
<Queue>String(255)</Queue>
<QueueType>String(16)</QueueType>
<QueueTarget>String(255)</QueueTarget>
</TaskDistributedQueue>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
238 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
TaskAssigned
Direction: Out
Description: The TaskAssigned message is submitted when the task is assigned to an agent.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskAssigned>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227
.
<AssignedToUser>String(64)</AssignedToUser>
</TaskAssigned>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
CompleteTask
Direction: In
Description: Completes the task that has a given capture ID or interaction ID.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<CompleteTask>
Standard action attributes, as documented in“Task Action” on page 226
.
</CompleteTask>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Action” on page 226 for a description of the attributes.
.
Table 55: Error Codes for CompleteTask Messages
Error code
CANNOT_COMPLETE_TASK
Description
Cannot complete the task, because it is already completed or assigned.
TaskCompleted
Direction: Out
Description: The
TaskCompleted
message is submitted as a response to the
CompleteTask
message (see “CompleteTask” on page 239 ), as well as when the
task is placed into the predefined
CompletedQueue
interaction queue in
Interaction Server.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskCompleted>
Deployment Guide 239
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227
</TaskCompleted>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
HoldTask
Direction: In
Description: Holds the task that has given task’s capture ID or interaction ID.
As soon as it is held, the task will not be reprioritized or, potentially, assigned
until it is resumed (see “ResumeTask” on page 241 ).
Only tasks that are not held, assigned, completed, canceled, or rejected can be held.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<HoldTask>
Standard action attributes, as documented in “Task Action” on page 226 .
</HoldTask>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Action” on page 226 for a description of the attributes.
.
Table 56: Error Codes for HoldTask Messages
Error code Description
CANNOT_HOLD_
ASSIGNED_TASK
Cannot hold the task because it is assigned, completed, canceled, rejected, or already held.
TaskHeld
Direction: Out
Description: The
TaskHeld
message is submitted as a response to the
HoldTask
message (see “HoldTask” on page 240
), as well as when the task is held from the iWD Manager.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskHeld>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227 .
</TaskHeld>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
240 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
TaskErrorHeld
Direction: Out
Description: The TaskErrorHeld message is submitted when the task gets held because of a configuration error (such as incomplete rules).
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskErrorHeld>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227 .
<Error>String(255)</Error>
</TaskErrorHeld>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
ResumeTask
Direction: In
Description: Resumes the held task that has the given task's capture ID or interaction ID.
As soon as it is resumed, the task will be processed and assigned normally, according to the iWD rules.
Only tasks that are held can be resumed.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<ResumeTask>
Standard action attributes, as documented in “Task Action” on page 226 .
</ResumeTask>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Action” on page 226 for a description of the attributes.
Response message: “TaskResumed” .
Table 57: Error Codes for ResumeTask Messages
Error code
CANNOT_RESUME_TASK
Description
Cannot resume the task, because it is not held.
TaskResumed
Direction: Out
Description: The
TaskResumed
message is submitted as a response to the
ResumeTask
message (see “ResumeTask” on page 241 ), as well as when a task
is held from iWD Manager.
Deployment Guide 241
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskResumed>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227 .
</TaskResumed>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
RestartTask
Direction: In
Description: Restarts the task that has the given task’s capture ID or interaction ID.
As soon as it is restarted, the task will be reclassified and reprioritized.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<RestartTask>
Standard action attributes, as documented in “Task Action” on page 226 .
</RestartTask>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Action” on page 226 for a description of the attributes.
Table 58: Error Codes for RestartTask Messages
Error code
CANNOT_RESTART_TASK
Description
Cannot restart the task, because it is held or assigned.
TaskRestarted
Direction: Out
Description: The
TaskRestarted
message is submitted as a response to the
RestartTask
message (see
, above), as well as when the task is either restarted from the iWD Manager or moved to the predefined
New interaction queue within the CIM Platform.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskRestarted>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227 .
</TaskRestarted>
</GTLMessages>
242 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
CancelTask
Direction: In
Description: Cancels the task that has the given task’s capture ID or interaction ID.
As soon as it is canceled, the interaction is moved to the iWD_Canceled
queue.
Tasks that have already been canceled cannot be canceled again. All other tasks can be canceled.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<CancelTask>
Standard action attributes, as documented in “Task Action” on page 226 .
</CancelTask>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Action” on page 226 for a description of the attributes.
Table 59: Error Codes for CancelTask Messages
Error code
CANNOT_CANCEL_TASK
Description
Tasks that have already been canceled cannot be canceled again, and tasks that have been assigned cannot be canceled. All other tasks can be canceled.
TaskCanceled
Direction: Out
Description: The
TaskCanceled
message is submitted as a response to the
CancelTask
message (see “CancelTask” ), as well as when the task is canceled
from iWD Manager.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskCanceled>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227 .
</TaskCanceled>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
Deployment Guide 243
Appendix A: iWD Messages Messages
TaskRejected
Direction: Out
Description: The TaskRejected message is submitted when the task gets rejected by the iWD Classification Service. The task can be rejected when a process or department to which the task gets assigned is currently inactive (that is, either expired or not yet active).
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<TaskRejected>
Standard notification attributes, as documented in “Task Notification” on page 227 .
</TaskRejected>
</GTLMessages>
Attributes: See “Task Notification” on page 227
for a description of the attributes.
Ping
Direction: In
Description: A simple
Ping
message that can be used to check the health of the Capture Point. The message includes an optional ID, which will be present in the corresponding
Pong
message.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<Ping>ID</Ping>
</GTLMessages>
Pong
Direction: Out
Description: Submitted as a response to the
Ping
message (see “Ping” on page 244
), indicating that the Capture Point service is active. The
Pong message contains the ID that was sent in the
Ping
message.
Format:
<GTLMessages>
<Pong>ID</Pong>
</GTLMessages>
244 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Task Attributes and Interaction Properties
Task Attributes and Interaction Properties
iWD task attributes are separated into three categories:
•
Core
•
Extended
•
Custom
Most of the iWD task attributes can be set when a task is created or updated through an iWD capture adapter, although some, such as interaction ID, are set by iWD components or by Interaction Server. Most of the task attributes are displayed in the
Attributes
tab when a task is selected in the Global Task List.
These attributes are maintained as pieces of attached data of the interaction, as it is stored in the Interaction Server’s interactions database table. Some of the attributes are stored in independent columns in that database table, while others are stored in a binary (BLOB) format in a column in the interactions table called flexible_properties
.
There are many reasons to update or access the data stored in the iWD task attributes, including:
•
Setting the value of one or more task attributes as part of an iWD message such as CreateTask , when working with an iWD capture adapter.
•
Reading or updating task attributes in business rules.
•
Using the data in the
Condition
,
Order
, and
Segmentation
tabs of Views in
Genesys Business Processes.
Note:
You cannot use properties with a
Timestamp
data type on the
Segmentation tab.
•
Reading or updating the data contained in task attributes within a routing strategy.
•
Making the data available to an agent or knowledge worker desktop application, either to display to the agent or to facilitate a screen pop.
•
Filtering the display of the Global Task List.
Note:
There are specific columns in the interactions
table that you should
not change. Please refer to Chapter 8, “Interaction Properties”, in the
eServices 8.0 User’s Guide.
provides information about how the iWD task attributes map to the columns in which their values are stored in the interactions database table, as well as the key name that is used in the attached data of the interaction, and the label used for that attribute as it appears on the
Attributes
tab of the Global
Task List.
Deployment Guide 245
Appendix A: iWD Messages Task Attributes and Interaction Properties
Refer to the beginning of this Appendix for details about how these task attributes are used in iWD messages such as
CreateTask.
Table 60: Task Attribute Mapping
Task Attribute Column Name in
Interactions Table
Type Interaction
Attached Data
Key
Label in Global
Task List
Core Attributes
BrokerId
Status a
Id queue
String
String mediaType
TenantId media_type
IWD_tenantId
String
String businessCalendarId in <flexible_properties> String
InteractionId
Queue
MediaType
IWD_tenantId
IWD_business
CalendarId
ID
Status
Media Type
Tenant
Business Calendar
DepartmentId
ProcessId
Channel
Category
CapturePointID
IWD_departmentId
IWD_processId
IWD_channel
IWD_category
IWD_capturePointId
String
String
String
String
String
IWD_departmentId Department (name is shown instead of ID)
IWD_processId Process (name is shown instead of
ID)
IWD_channel
IWD_Category
IWD_capturePoint
Id
ExternalId
Channel
Category
Capture Point
(value is shown instead of ID)
Capture ID CaptureId external_id String
CreatedDateTime received_at Timestamp ReceivedAt
DistributionPointId IWD_distributionPointId String IWD_distribution
PointId
Capture D/T
Distribution Point
ActivationDateTime IWD_activationDateTime Timestamp
BusinessValue IWD_businessValue String
Activation D/T
IWD_businessValue Business Value
DueDateTime
Priority
IWD_dueDateTime priority
Timestamp IWD_dueDateTime Task Due D/T
Integer Priority Priority
246 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Task Attributes and Interaction Properties
Table 60: Task Attribute Mapping (Continued)
Task Attribute Column Name in
Interactions Table
Type Interaction
Attached Data
Key
ReprioritizeDate
Time
AssignedToUser
IWD_reprioritizeDateTime Timestamp IWD_reprioritize
DateTime assigned_to String RTargetAgent
Selected
AssignedDateTime assigned_at Timestamp AssignedAt
-
completed_at
IWD_solutionId
Extended Attributes
Timestamp CompletedAt
ExpirationDateTime IWD_expirationDateTime Timestamp IWD_expiration
DateTime
String IWD_solutionId
CustomerSegment IWD_ext_customer
Segment
CustomerId IWD_ext_customerId
String
String
ProductType
ProductSubtype
RequestedAgent
Group
RequestedPlace
Group
SourceTenant
SourceProcessType IWD_ext_sourceProcess
SourceProcess
Subtype
IWD_ext_productType
IWD_ext_sourceProduct
Subtype
IWD_ext_RequestedAgent
Group
IWD_ext_RequestedPlace
Group
IWD_ext_sourceTenant
Type
IWD_ext_sourceProcess
SubType
String
String
String
String
String
-
Label in Global
Task List
Reprioritization
D/T
Assigned To
Assigned D/T
Completed D/T
Expiration D/T
IWD_ext_customer
Segment
Customer
Segment
IWD_ext_customer
Id
Customer ID
Product IWD_ext_product
Type
IWD_ext_product
Subtype
Subproduct
Requested Agent
Group
IWD_ext_
RequestedAgent
Group
IWD_ext_
RequestedPlace
Group
IWD_ext_source
Tenant
IWD_ext_source
ProcessType
IWD_ext_source
ProcessSubtype
Requested Place
Group
TOS Tenant
TOS Process
TOS Subprocess
Deployment Guide 247
Appendix A: iWD Messages Task Attributes and Interaction Properties
Table 60: Task Attribute Mapping (Continued)
Task Attribute Column Name in
Interactions Table
Type Interaction
Attached Data
Key
Label in Global
Task List
SourceFirstCreated
DateTime
SourceCreatedDate
Time
SourceDueDate
Time
ResultCode
RequestedAgent
RequestedSkill
IWD_ext_sourceFirst
CreatedDT
IWD_ext_sourceCreated
DateTime
IWD_ext_sourceDueDate
Time
IWD_ext_resultCode
IWD_ext_requestedAgent String
IWD_ext_requestedSkill
Timestamp IWD_ext_source
FirstCreatedDate
Time
Timestamp IWD_ext_source
CreatedDateTime
Timestamp IWD_ext_source
DueDateTime
String IWD_ext_Result
Code
String
-
TOS Created D/T
TOS Due D/T
Result Code
IWD_ext_requested
Agent
Requested Agent
IWD_ext_requested
Skill
Requested Skill
Custom Attributes
myCustomAttribute in <flexible_properties> String
ArchiveDestination
ESP_Result
ESP_Error in <flexible_properties> in <flexible_properties> in <flexible_properties>
String
String
String myCustomAttribute myCustom
Attribute
ArchiveDestination Archive
Destination
ESP_Result
ESP_Error
ESP_Result
ESP_Error a. The value of
Status
does not correlate directly to the contents of the queue
column in the interactions table.
It is dynamically calculated, taking into account information such as the queue and whether the task is held or not. Because the contents of the Status column are dynamically calculated, rather than being read from a database table, the Global Task List cannot be sorted by the Status column. You should use filters instead, if you are interested in focusing in on the contents of the list by this criterion.
Interaction Custom Properties
If you want to use the value of a task attribute in the
Condition
,
Order
, and
Segmentation
tabs of Views in Genesys Business Processes, or if you want to filter or sort the display of the Global Task List by using a task attribute, that task attribute must be represented in an independent column in the Interaction
Server’s interactions
database table. If that task attribute is inside the binary data in the flexible_properties
column, you must create an Interaction
248 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix A: iWD Messages Task Attributes and Interaction Properties
Custom Property that corresponds to that attribute. The data type of the property can be a timestamp, string, or number.
Note:
Properties with the Timestamp data type cannot be used on the
Segmentation
tab of Views in a Genesys Business Process.
Procedure:
Configuring a custom interaction property
Start of procedure
1. Decide on an attached data key that will be the source of the content of the custom property.
2. Create a new field directly in the interactions database.
3. Create a new Business Attribute:
Name = InteractionCustomProperties
Display name =
Interaction Custom Properties
Type =
Custom
If such an attribute already exists go to the next step.
4. Expand
Interaction Custom Properties and open its
Attribute values.
5. Give it an
Attribute Value
, with a name exactly matching the attached data key name that you decided on in Step 1. The matching is case sensitive (you can create a separate display name).
6. In your new attribute value, go to the
Annex tab and create a section called translation.
7. In the new
translation section, create an option called
translate-to, with its value duplicating the name of the new field you created in
End of procedure
Note:
If you specify a custom field as not null, you must ensure that you provide some data to that field upon creation of a task. If no data is provided, the request will fail because Interaction Server sends NULL for empty fields, and that will be rejected by the DBMS.
Deployment Guide 249
Appendix A: iWD Messages Task Attributes and Interaction Properties
250 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix
B
iWD Business Process
(IWDBP)
This Appendix describes the default iWD business process (
IWDBP
) that is supplied in the iWD Setup Utility component.
•
The Universal Routing 8.0 Deployment Guide describes how to have the
Interaction Design shortcut bar appear in IRD, if it has not appeared automatically.
•
The Universal Routing 8.0 Business Process User’s Guide provides an in-depth discussion of business processes.
•
The Universal Routing 8.0 Interaction Routing Designer Help describes how to create, save, import and export a business process, and how to load the strategies that comprise the business process.
Note:
When Interaction Routing Designer (IRD) starts up, it checks for an eServices solution installed by the eServices Configuration Wizard. If none is found, the IRD main window does not contain an
Interaction
Design
shortcut bar. You cannot navigate to the
Business Processes list pane or open the Interaction Design window. To change the default, use the
Views
tab in
Routing Design Options
, which opens from the
Tools
menu. Clear the default
check box and click
OK
.
This Appendix contains the following sections:
Configuration of List Objects, page 252
iWD Business Process, page 253
Modifying the iWD Business Process, page 272
Deployment Guide 251
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) Configuration of List Objects
Configuration of List Objects
One Business Process can serve several solutions under the same tenant. At least one ESP service server has to be configured per solution (see
“Configuring Multiple Business Context Management Services” on page 221
for information about using Application Clusters). Capture Points add Solution
ID to an interaction automatically. Inside of the business process, an ESP service is invoked. In order to specify which ESP service is invoked, the correlation between an iWD solution and an ESP service is set up inside of a
List Object.
The iWD Setup Utility creates an empty List Object called Iwd_Esp_List . In environments with only one solution, no further configuration needs to be done on the List Object. If you have multiple solutions (or add one at a later time) the
Iwd_Esp_List
List Object needs to be updated.
Notes:
If you run the iWD Setup Utility more than once, the new Business
Context Management Service(s) will be added to the existing
Iwd_Esp_List
List Object.
Refer to
page 221 for information about configuring multiple
Business Context Management Services.
The List Object looks like a list of pairs:
Solution_1 ESPService_1
Solution_2 ESPService_2
Solution_i ESPService_i
Where the Solution ID is the key, and the name of the Business Context
Management Service
Application
is the value.
Note:
It is very important that the pairs are set up correctly. If, for example,
Solution_1 is mapped to ESPService_2 instead of to ESPService_1, business rules for Solution_2 will be applied to all interactions which were submitted by Capture Points from Solution_1.
252 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
These key-value pairs in a List Object need to be set up only once per tenant, and can be configured in Interaction Routing Designer (IRD). See
.
Figure 71: List Objects in IRD
shows the details of the List Object.
Figure 72: List Object Details
iWD Business Process
The iWD business process (
IWDBP
) contains the following strategies:
• Classification
• Prioritization
Deployment Guide 253
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
• Distribution
• Archive
The iWD business process contains the following subroutine:
• DetermineESPServerName
The iWD business process contains the following queues:
• iWD_New
• iWD_Captured
• iWD_Queued
• iWD_Canceled
• iWD_Rejected
• iWD_Completed
• iWD_ErrorHeld
The Interaction Queues that are included in the out of the box
IWDBP
business process must be present, and the names should not be changed. The Global
Task List looks for specific Interaction Queue names, as they appear in the business process (such as iWD_New and
iWD_Queued
). If you modify the business process to add additional queues or rename existing queues, the interactions will not display properly in the Global Task List. No status will be displayed for interactions in Interaction Queues with names that the Global Task List does not recognize.
shows the entire business process as it appears in the
Interaction
Design
window of Interaction Routing Designer.
Figure 73: iWD Business Process
The group of objects on the left-hand side are part of the “Main Flow” of the business process.
shows this section in more detail. The group of
254 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process objects on the right-hand side represent the “Archiving” section of the business process.
shows the Archiving section in more detail.
Figure 74: iWD Business Process—Main Flow
Deployment Guide 255
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
Figure 75: iWD Business Process—Archiving
Classification Strategy
The purpose of this strategy is to invoke corresponding classification rules, analyze the result of the rules application and place the interaction into the appropriate queue, depending on the result.
This strategy processes interactions from the following queues:
• iWD_New
Interactions have to satisfy the following conditions (see Figure 76 ):
There are no conditions here.
Interactions are taken in order they were submitted.
256
Figure 76: The ‘All’ Interaction Queue View Properties
Note:
ESP stands for External Service Protocol. In this document it is the
Business Context Management Service.
intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP)
shows the
Classification
strategy.
iWD Business Process
Figure 77: Classification Strategy
Summary of flow
Note:
The IRD objects described in this section are keyed to the numbers in
.
1. Variables are initialized (see
):
_counter
is the running counter for the numbers of attempts to invoke the ESP service.
Deployment Guide 257
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
_max_repeate_counter
specifies how many times to attempt to invoke the ESP service
_delay
specifies the delay (in milliseconds) between attempts to invoke rules.
Figure 78: Initialize Variables
2. A command is sent to URS to use interaction age while sorting interactions in internal queues.
3. The subroutine that determines the correct ESP server name is invoked.
This subroutine also sets up cases when there is reason to retry to invoke the ESP server.
4. If the subroutine fails an error is extracted.
5. This error is attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key
IWD_ESP_Determination_Error
.
6. A request to apply classification rules to the interaction is sent.
7. If ESP server reports that operation was completed successfully, the results are attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key ESP_Result . This key-value pair will have the following format: return:ok| NumberOfRulesApplied:<number of applied rules>|RulesApplied:<rule 1 id> <rule1 name>, <rule2 id> <rule2 name>, ...
Here is an example of what the result might look like:
AttributeUserData [list, size (unpacked)=168] =
‘ESP_Result’ [str] =
“return:ok|NumberOfRulesApplied:12|RulesApplied:McrSlt1GlbClsf1
McrSlt1GlbClassification1, McrSlt1GlbClsf2
McrSlt1GlbClassification2”
8. Verification is done to check if a business process was assigned by a classification rule.
9. If a business process was assigned, then the interaction is placed in the iWD_Captured queue.
258 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
10. If a business process was not assigned in
, then the interaction is placed in the iWD_ErrorHeld
queue.
11. If rules could not be applied, the reason is provided.
12. The reason is analyzed, and a decision is made whether another attempt should be made to apply the rules.
13. The last error is attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key
ESP_Error
. The following is an example of what the result could look like:
AttributeUserData [list, size (unpacked)=143] = ‘ESP_Error’ [str] =
“605 Department 'McrSlt1_D1' has expired on 2010-08-15T00:00:00”
14. The last error is analyzed. If error is between 604 and 607, that means the
Department/Process is not active yet.
15. If the department or process is not active yet, the interaction is placed in the iWD_Rejected
queue.
16. For all other errors, the interaction is placed in the iWD_ErrorHeld
queue.
17. A check is done to see if the maximum number of attempts (see Step 1
) has been reached.
18. If the maximum number of attempts has been reached, the most recent error is attached to the interaction and the interaction is placed in the iWD_ErrorHeld
queue.
19. If the maximum number of attempts has not been reached, the counter is increased by 1.
20. The interaction is delayed for the amount of milliseconds specified in
_delay
(see
) before another attempt is made to apply the rules.
Prioritization Strategy
The purpose of this strategy is to invoke the corresponding prioritization rules, analyze the result of the rules application and place the interaction into the appropriate queue, depending on the result.
This strategy processes interactions from the following queues:
• iWD_Captured
Interactions have to satisfy following conditions (see
):
Active interactions only, (interactions which do not have the property
IWD_activationDateTime set, or this property has a time stamp which is in the past.
Interactions are taken in the order they were submitted.
Deployment Guide 259
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
Figure 79: The ‘Active interactions only’ Interaction Queue View Properties
• iWD_Queued
Interactions have to satisfy the following conditions (see Figure 80 ):
Interactions that are subject for immediate reprioritization (interactions that have the property IWD_reprioritizeDateTime set, and this property has a time stamp which is in the past)
Interactions are taken in order of
IWD_reprioritizationDateTime
(oldest first).
Figure 80: The ‘To reprioritize’ Interaction Queue View Properties
shows the
Prioritization
strategy.
260 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
Figure 81: Prioritization Strategy
Summary of Flow
Note:
The IRD objects described in this section are keyed to the numbers in
.
1. Variables are initialized:
•
source_queue
is the queue from which the interactions came. It will be used to determine if the prioritization service is being requested for initial prioritization or reprioritization.
•
BCMS_error_timeout_ms
specifies the delay (in milliseconds) between attempts to invoke rules.
•
_default_priority specifies the priority which will be assigned if a priority is not specified by the customer (as part of the task capture) or by rules.
Deployment Guide 261
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
2. The subroutine that determines the correct ESP server name is invoked.
This subroutine also sets up cases when there is reason to retry to invoke the ESP server.
3. If the subroutine fails an error is extracted.
4. This error is attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key
IWD_ESP_Determination_Error
.
5. The User Data key-value pairs
ESP_Result
and
ESP_Error
are set to an empty string.
6. A request to apply prioritization rules to the interaction is sent.
7. If the ESP server reports that the operation was completed successfully, the result is attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key
ESP_Result
.
This key-value pair will have following format:
“return:ok| NumberOfRulesApplied:<number of applied rules>|RulesApplied:<rule 1 id> <rule1 name>, <rule2 id> <rule2 name>, “
The following is an example of what the result could look like:
AttributeUserData [list, size (unpacked)=168] =
'ESP_Result' [str] =
“return:ok|NumberOfRulesApplied:2|RulesApplied:McrSlt1GlbPrior1
McrSlt1GlbPrioritization1, McrSlt1GlbClsf2
McrSlt1GlbPrioritization2”
8. A check is made as to whether it is the initial prioritization, and whether the priority was set.
9. If the request to apply prioritization rules is for reprioritization, or if the priority was set to a value (other than the default value set by the BCMS service, which is
1
), than the interaction is placed in the iWD_Queued queue.
10. If the request to apply prioritization rules is for initial prioritization, and priority was not set in rules, then the following error message is attached:
Priority is not set up by rules.
11. The interaction is placed in the iWD_ErrorHeld
queue.
12. If rules could not be applied, the reason is provided.
13. The most recent error is attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key
ESP_Error
. The following is an example of what the result will look like if prioritization rules were not configured: attr_changed_prop [list, size (unpacked)=65] = 'ESP_Result' [str] =
“return:ok|NumberOfRulesApplied:0|RulesApplied:”
14. The interaction is delayed for the amount of milliseconds specified in
_BCMS_error_timeout_ms
) before another attempt is made to apply the rules.
262 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
Distribution Strategy
This simple strategy routes interactions to a requested Agent, requested Agent
Group, requested Skill, or to the default iWD Agent Group.
This strategy processes interactions from the following queues:
• iWD_Queued
Interactions have to satisfy the following conditions (see Figure 82 ):
Interactions that are not subject for immediate reprioritization
(interactions that do not have the property IWD_reprioritizeDateTime set, or that have this property set to a time stamp that is in the future).
Interactions are taken in order of priority (highest priority first)
Figure 82: The ‘To distribute’ Interaction Queue View Properties
shows the
Distribution
strategy.
Deployment Guide 263
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
Figure 83: Distribution Strategy
264 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
Summary of Flow
Note:
The IRD objects described in this section are keyed to the numbers in
.
1. Extract information about requested agent and skill and initialize internal variables. See
.
Figure 84: Requested Agent and Skill
2. A calculation is done to determine the timeout—how long the interaction should wait for a target to become available.
3. If the reprioritize time was set up and the calculated timeout is less than or equal to the default timeout (
1 hour
, see Step 1 ), then the timeout remains
as it is.
4. If the reprioritize time was not set, or the calculated timeout is greater than the default timeout, then the waiting timeout is set to the default (
1 hour
).
5. Analysis is done to determine whether an agent was requested.
6. If an agent was requested, the URS variable is prepared ( .a is added).
Deployment Guide 265
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
7. Try to route the interaction to the requested agent without waiting (see
).
Figure 85: Route to Agent
8. Try to route the interaction to an agent with the requested skill without waiting (see
).
266
Figure 86: Route to Skill
9. Analysis is done to determine whether an Agent Group was requested.
10. If an Agent Group was requested, the URS variable is prepared (
.ga is added).
intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
11. Try to route the interaction to the requested Agent Group without waiting
(see
).
Figure 87: Route to Requested Agent Group
12. Try to route the interaction to the iWD agent group with a wait time of 60 seconds (see
).
Deployment Guide
Figure 88: Route to Agent Group
13. Get the last error.
14. Verification is done as to why the target was not found.
15. An error code is attached in case of any error other than a timeout.
If more than one target is available, URS uses the
StatAgentsLoading
statistic to select the Agent who has the minimum load (this applies to routing to Skills and routing to Groups only; routing to a requested Agent does not use statistics). For more information about this statistic, see the Universal Routing
8.0 Reference Manual.
267
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
The Route Interaction object also has an
Interaction Queue
tab. See
. (This applies to all three Route Interaction objects in this strategy.)
Figure 89: Route Interaction Properties—Interaction Queue
The optional
Interaction Queue
tab enables you to specify two types of queues:
Queues for existing interactions (the queue in which the interaction should be placed after the agent is done working with it).
Queues for new interactions (the queue in which new interactions created by the agent should be placed).
A Description (optional) appears as a hint on the agent desktop as to where to place the interaction.
Archive Strategy
The purpose of this strategy is to invoke the corresponding archiving rules, analyze the result of the rules application, and process the interaction accordingly. There are three archive destinations: delete the interaction, reschedule archiving for some time in the future, and archive the interaction to another Interaction Server database. A key-value pair in user data with the key
IWD_expirationDateTime contains information about when an interaction has to be archived.
This strategy processes interactions form following queues:
• iWD_Completed
• iWD_Canceled
• iWD_Rejected
268 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
Interactions have to satisfy the following conditions (see Figure 90 ):
•
Interactions that are not subject for archiving (interactions that do not have the property
IWD_expirationDateTime
set, or this property has a time stamp which is in the past).
•
Interactions are taken in the order they were submitted.
Figure 90: The ‘Expired only’ Interaction Queue View Properties
shows the
Archive
strategy.
Figure 91: Archive Strategy
Deployment Guide 269
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
Summary of Flow
Note:
The IRD objects described in this section are keyed to the numbers in
.
1. Variables are initialized (see
):
_default_reschedule
is the default interval (in seconds) for archive rescheduling. The default value is
864000
(10 days). The default value will be used if archiving rules were not configured, a new archiving time was not configured, or in case of error.
_old_expiration_dt_str
is a string that is taken from the interaction before any archive rules are invoked.
_old_expiration_dt_int
is an integer that is taken from
_old_expiration_dt_str.
Figure 92: Archive Strategy—Initialize Variables
2. The subroutine that determines the correct ESP server name is invoked.
This subroutine also sets up cases when there is reason to retry to invoke
the ESP server. A retry mechanism is not included. See “Classification
Strategy” on page 256 for an example.
3. If the subroutine fails an error is extracted.
4. This error is attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key
IWD_ESP_Determination_Error
.
5. The User Data key-value pairs
ESP_Result
and
ESP_Error
are set to an empty string.
6. A request to apply archiving rules to the interaction is sent.
7. The ESP result is formed in the following format:
“return:ok| NumberOfRulesApplied:<number of applied rules>|RulesApplied:<rule1id> <rule1name>, <rule2id> <rule2name>,
...”
8. The result is attached to User Data as a key-value pair with the key
ESP_Result
.
270 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) iWD Business Process
9. The result of the rules application is analyzed. See
.
Figure 93: Result of Rules Application
10. Any archiving destination except those listed in Figure 93 will cause
processing of the interaction to stop. The interaction will also be deleted from the Interaction Server runtime database.
11. An exact copy of the interaction will be submitted to the Interaction Server that is specified in the
Application Name
field of the External Service block. See
.
Deployment Guide
Figure 94: Specify Interaction Server
271
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) Modifying the iWD Business Process
12. If the submission is a success, processing will be stopped on the interaction and the interaction will be deleted from the Interaction Server runtime database.
13. If the submission failed, the last error is retrieved.
14. The most recent error is attached to User Data as a key-value pair with the key
ESP_Error
.
15. If a new expiration timestamp exists, it is extracted.
16. Analysis is done to determine if a new expiration timestamp was set up.
17. If the new expiration timestamp is different from the old one, it means that archiving rules were configured and applied correctly. Therefore, the interaction is returned to the original queue for future archiving.
18. If there is no new expiration timestamp, a default timestamp is created. See
.
Figure 95: Default Timestamp is Created
19. The new expiration timestamp is attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key
IWD_expirationDateTime
.
20. The reason why the operation failed is received.
21. The most recent error is attached to user data as a key-value pair with the key
ESP_Error
. The following is an example of what the result could look like:
AttributeUserData [list, size (unpacked)=130] = 'ESP_Error' [str] =
“608 No archive destination set by archiving rules
Modifying the iWD Business Process
For most environments, the only modification that will need to be made to the iWD Business Process is to the
Distribution
strategy (see
recommended approach to do this is to add a new strategy into the iWD
Business Process, and replace the connection from
iWD_Queued/All
view to the
Distribution
routing strategy with a connection from iWD_Queued
to your own
272 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) Modifying the iWD Business Process routing strategy where distribution logic is described. Then, link your new distribution strategy to the out of the box iWD_Completed
queue.
By modifying the business process in this way, rather than simply updating the provided Distribution strategy, you can easily import any new versions of the iWD Business Process that might be available in the future (the links will have to be reestablished to your own distribution strategy).
Deployment Guide 273
Appendix B: iWD Business Process (IWDBP) Modifying the iWD Business Process
274 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix
C
Adapting the iWD Business
Process for Standard
Genesys Channels
This Appendix describes how to adapt the iWD Business Process (
IWDBP
) to work with standard Genesys non-voice channels, such as e-mail, chat, SMS,
Gplus Adapters, and custom integrations built with Open Media.
This Appendix contains the following sections:
Adapting IWDBP to Serve E-mail Interactions, page 275
Adapting IWDBP to Serve E-mail
Interactions
This section explains what should be done to adapt the iWD business process to serve e-mail interactions.
Adding Required Properties to Interactions
In order to keep Data Mart functionality intact and to make Genesys standard channel interactions visible in iWD Manager, some key-value pairs need to be added to the user data of these interactions. The interactions should only be placed into the input queue for the default iWD business process after these key-value pairs have been added.
The key-value pairs are:
•
IWD_tenantId
•
IWD_solutionId
Deployment Guide 275
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Adapting IWDBP to Serve E-mail
•
IWD_capturePointId
To make the process easier, the iWD Setup Utility includes an additional business process,
Standard Genesys to IWD adapter
business process attaches the required key-value pairs to an interaction and places it into the input queue of the default business process
IWDBP
.
Figure 96: Standard Genesys to iWD Adapter Business Process
shows the
Genesys to IWD
strategy.
Figure 97: Genesys to iWD Strategy
In the
Multi Assign
object, you have to initialize all variables, as shown in
.
Figure 98: Assign Variables
276 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Adapting IWDBP to Serve E-mail
The IDs are taken from iWD Manager. Figure 99 and Figure 100 show where
to find your Tenant ID and Solution ID, respectively.
Figure 99: Tenant ID
Figure 100:Solution ID
In order to get an ID for a capture point you have to create a “dummy” capture point. This will represent a Genesys standard server (in our example, E-mail server). Use the
Webservice Capture Point
template to create a simple
“dummy” capture point. The ID is the only property that is needed. It does not
matter what you enter for the rest of the properties. Figure 101
shows the iWD
Capture Point ID.
Deployment Guide 277
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Adapting IWDBP to Serve E-mail
Figure 101:iWD Capture Point ID
Adding E-mail Server
E-mail Server needs to be added to the
Standard Genesys to IWD Adapter business process. You can add E-Mail Server in two ways:
1. In Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, you can update the
E-Mail Server application options to specify iWD_Adapter_ext as an output queue. Add a section called endpoint:[YourTenantDBID].
In this section, add a new option default
. Set the value of default
to iWD_Adapter_ext
, as shown in
Figure 102 . Next, refresh in IRD and E-mail Server will be added
to the business process with the iWD_Adapter_ext queue.
Figure 102:Updating E-mail Server for Standard Genesys to IWD Adapter Business Process
2. The second way to add E-mail Server is to do so explicitly in IRD. Add
E-mail server from
Media Servers
to the
Standard Genesys to IWD Adapter business process and make a connection to the iWD_Adapter_ext queue. In this method, IRD will update the corresponding option and section in the
E-Mail Server application.
278 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Adapting IWDBP to Serve E-mail
Standard Genesys to IWD Adapter
business process will look after these modifications.
Figure 103:Standard Genesys to iWD Adapter Business Process After
Modifications
Modify the Distribution Strategy
In IRD, open the IWDBP business process. Open the Distribution strategy.
Since there are business actions
Request Agent
and
Request Skill
, the default business process has to take this into consideration. This is why there are three objects of type
Route Interaction
.
If you have only one Stat Server listed in the Connections tab of Interaction
Server, you can skip this step. If not, for the object
Route interaction to
AgentGroup IWD
in the
Target Selection
tab, change the Genesys Stat Server application name and target according to your configuration. Also you can change how long URS has to wait for the next available agent (by default it is
set to 60 seconds). See Figure 104 .
Figure 104:Update Route Interaction to Agent Group IWD
Deployment Guide 279
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Adapting IWDBP to Serve E-mail
You might want to check all of the provided
Route Interaction
objects (by double-clicking on them) to see if they satisfy your business logic. Pay attention only to what statistics are used for
Skill
and
AgentGroup
routing.
Allowing Agents to Send Replies to Inbound E-mails
There are two ways to allow agents to send replies to inbound e-mails: create a new queue and a new strategy in the
IWDBP,
or use a business process that already exists. In this example an existing business process will be used to illustrate how other business processes can be used from the iWD business process.
First, choose a business process to handle agent’s replies and outbound e-mails. Second, specify the queue into which the agent’s reply will be placed.
Third, specify the business process and queue for single outbound e-mails from agents.
In this example the
ABC Simple
business process will process agent’s replies
(with the Outbound queue). Also, agents will be given the ability to place interactions into the iWD_Completed
queue. All of this will be done in the
Distribution strategy. The Route Interaction properties in the strategy must be
.
280 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 105:Route Interaction Object for Distribution Strategy
Examples
In these examples we assume that the default iWD Business Process (
IWDBP
) provides all necessary steps for e-mail processing—namely classification, prioritization, and distribution.
The purpose of these examples is to show what needs to be done in order to use
IWDBP
and standard iWD functionality (such as classification and prioritization rules) for e-mail processing.
Note:
The following examples are presented as guidelines. Some of the strategies and objects in the business processes might not be exactly as shown in the following examples.
Deployment Guide 281
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Requirements:
•
A Genesys E-mail solution is installed
•
An iWD solution is installed
Assumptions:
Only one iWD solution will be served by iWDBP
. The default iWD business process will process interactions with any media type (the interaction will pass through the business process and be delivered to an agent), but business rules created in these examples will be applicable to e-mails only. We have only one
Agent Group to which the interactions will be assigned.
For all examples, the main flow of IWDBP is as shown in
.
Figure 106: Main Flow of IWDBP
You can add E-Mail Server in two ways:
1. In Configuration Manager or Genesys Administrator, you can update the
E-Mail Server application options to specify iWD_New
as an output queue.
Add a section called endpoint:[YourTenantDBID].
In this section, add a new option default
. Set the value of default
to iWD_New
, as shown in
Figure 106 . Next, refresh in IRD and E-mail Server will be added to the
business process with the
iWD_New
queue.
282 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 107:Update E-Mail Server Options
2. The second way to add E-mail Server is to do so explicitly in IRD. Add
E-mail server from
Media Servers
to your business process and make a connection to the iWD_New
queue. In this method, IRD will update the corresponding option and section in the E-Mail Server application.
Example 1
This is a simple example of how business rules can be used. In this example, the default iWD business process will be used for processing Genesys e-mails.
Use Case
In this example, the following scenario/use case is used:
•
For all interactions with
MediaType = email
, the property
ServiceType
will be set to
ChangeAddress
.
•
The property priority
will be set to
100
for all e-mail interactions.
•
Interactions of any
MediaType
should be delivered to the Agent Group
IWD
(interactions with the highest priority have to be delivered first).
•
E-mail interactions have to be reprioritized every 2 hours.
•
After each reprioritization the priority have to be increased by 5.
Genesys
Configuration
Preparation of Components
To prepare the Genesys configuration:
•
Add Agents into the
IWD
Agent Group.
•
Set up a connection between Interaction Server and the External Service
Provider service. According to
IWDBP
, Interaction Server will send interactions to an iWD External Service Provider service (ESPService) to apply business rules. In order to do that, we have to “explain” to
Interaction Server where to find the ESPService. This is done by adding an
Application that represent the ESPService, to the
Connections
of the
Interaction Server application.
•
Set the proper outbound queue for E-mail Server. Interactions that are submitted by E-mail Server have to reach the iWD business process in some way. In order to do that we need to change the outbound queue for the E-mail Server application to iWD_New in the endpoints
section (refer to the first method of adding E-mail Server to the business process on
for details). Now your E-mail Server will submit interactions into the iWD_New
queue, which is the entry point for the default iWD business process.
Deployment Guide 283
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
iWD Configuration
To prepare the iWD configuration:
Note:
It is recommended to give meaningful names for iWD services and objects. The following format could be useful:
<iWDTenantName><iWDSolutionName><ServiceTypeServiceName>
or
<iWDTenantName><iWDSolutionName><ParentObjectNameObjectName>
.
IWDBP
Preparation
•
Login into iWD Manger by using the default
person account.
•
Create a new iWD tenant. From the drop-down list choose the corresponding Genesys Tenant. It is recommended to give the new iWD tenant the same name as the Genesys tenant. In this example the iWD tenant name will be Mcr .
•
Under iWD tenant
Mcr
create a new solution and name it
McrSlt.
•
Under iWD tenant
Mcr
create a new Role under Security Policy and give some permissions.
•
Under the new solution create the following iWD configurations objects:
iWD Runtime Node. For
Context URL
use the directory name iwd_node provided during installation (by default it should be http://localhost:8080/iwd_node/
). For the
Application
property, use the iWD Runtime Node application as configured in Configuration
Manager or Genesys Administrator.
iWD Rules service iWD Logging service
iWD Configuration Server Connector service iWD Interaction Server Connector service iWD Business Context Management service. For the
Application property, use the iWD Business Context Management Service application as configured in Configuration Manager or Genesys
Administrator.
To prepare the iWD business process:
•
In IRD open
IWDBP
. Open the
Distribution
strategy. Double-click on the
RouteInteraction
block. In the
Target Selection tab, change the Genesys
Stat Server application name and target according to your configuration.
You can also change how long URS has to wait for an available agent. By default it is set to 60 seconds. See
284 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 108:Preparing the iWD Business Process
Modify the
Standard Rules
Template
Create Rules
For simplicity, in this example conditions will be added to the Standard Rules
Template, which is used for all iWD tenants.
1. Under
Modules & Components
choose the
System
tenant, expand
Rule
Templates
and choose
Standard Rules Template
. Click the add icon
(labeled as 1 on
2. In the
Language Expression
column, add a description for the condition
(see
).
3. In the
Rule Language Mapping
column enter the corresponding text (see
).
Deployment Guide 285
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels
4. Click
Save
.
Examples
Figure 109:Add a Condition to the Standard Rules Template
Add more Conditions. Enter the text according to
.
Table 61: Conditions
Language Expression
If Reprioritization was not set up
If Reprioritization was set up and in the past
Rule Language Mapping
eval( isNull(“IWD_reprioritizeDateTime”, $data) );
Note: The Standard Rules Template contains a standard rule condition called “Is first prioritization” that does the same thing as “If
Reprioritization was not set up”, but “If
Reprioritization was not set up” is included in this example to give you another working example of how to achieve the same result in a business rule.
eval( notNull(“IWD_reprioritizeDateTime”, $data)
&& getDTValue(“IWD_reprioritizeDateTime”,
$data).before(getCurrentDT()) );
286 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Table 61: Conditions (Continued)
Language Expression
If KVPair “{k}” is “{v}”
If KVPair “{k}” is not “{v}”
Rule Language Mapping
eval( getStringValue(“{k}”, $data).equals(“{v}”) );
Note: The Standard Rules Template contains a standard rule condition called “String “{attribute}” equals “{stringValue}” that does the same thing as
If KVPair “{k}” is “{v}”. If KVPair “{k}” is “{v}” is included in this example to give you another working example of how to achieve the same result in business rules.
If KVPair “{k}” is not “{v}”eval( notNull(“{k}”,
$data) && !getStringValue(“{k}”,
$data).equals(“{v}”) );
To make this example as flexible as possible, add a universal action. This action will make it possible to add an key-value pair to user data. Click on the
Action tab, and add a new action. In the Language Expression column enter:
Attach Custom KVPair “{key}” “{value}
.
In the
Rule Language Mapping column enter: setStringValue(“{key}”, “{value}”, $data);
Note:
The Standard Rules Template contains a standard rule action that does the same thing as
Attach Custom KVPair
:
Set string “{attribute}” value “{stringValue}”. Attach Custom KVPair is used here as an example of how to configure an action.
Create a
Classification Rule
Create a classification rule. The numbers in the following steps are keyed to
. For simplicity Global Rules are used in this example, but these classification rules could also be created at the Capture Point level, if a Capture
Point ID was added to the interaction as described in “Adding Required
Properties to Interactions” on page 275
.
1. Select
Departments & Processes.
2. Select your iWD tenant.
3. Select
Global Rules.
4. Select
New Linear Rule.
5. Enter a name for the new rule.
6. Select classification
as the
Phase.
7. Click
Add condition
and select a condition.
8. The selected condition is added.
9. Select e-mail.
Deployment Guide 287
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels
10. Click
Add action.
11. Select Attach Custom KVPair.
12. Enter
ServiceType
and
ChangeAddress.
13. Also add
Set Priority 100.
14. For simplicity we will set up time for Reprioritization here.
15. Click Save .
Examples
Figure 110:Create a Classification Rule
Create a
Prioritization Rule
Create a prioritization rule. The numbers in the following steps are keyed to
. For simplicity, Global Rules are used in this example, but these prioritization rules could also be created at the Department or Process level. In this case, you would first need to add a rule back at the Global Rules or
Capture Point level with the rule action Assign iWD process , to assign the interaction to an iWD Process.
1. Select Departments & Processes.
2. Select your iWD tenant.
3. Select
Global Rules.
4. Select
New Linear Rule.
5. Enter a name for the new rule.
6. Select prioritization
as the
Phase.
7. Click
Add condition
and select a condition.
8. The selected condition is added.
288 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
9. Select e-mail.
10. Add one more condition.
11. Select
Add action
and select
Increase Priority
and
Reprioritize After
12. The selected actions are added.
13. Set values
2 hours
and
5 like in
.
14. Click Save .
Figure 111:Create a Prioritization Rule
Deploy
Modifications
After new rules are created or business objects are modified, the changes have to be deployed before they will have an affect on your business process. If there are undeployed changes in your environment, a notification will appear in the header bar in iWD Manager. See
. You can either click the
Deployment Guide 289
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 112:Deploy Changes
Notes on the iWD Business Process
The following are some important things to note about the iWD business process:
•
Behavior of the iWD_Queued
queue and
ActivatedOnly
view—if the interaction does not have a key-value pair with the key
IWD_activationDateTime
it will be processed immediately; otherwise the interaction will be delayed according to the time stamp in the key-value pair.
•
Behavior of iWD_Queued
queue and
ToReprioritize
view—interactions will only be taken through this view if they have a user data key-value pair with the key
IWD_reprioritizeDateTime
and only then if the time that is specified is in the past. This key-value pair is set up by a prioritization
business rule. See “Create a Prioritization Rule” on page 288 .
Path of E-mail Interactions in IWDBP
All business rules will only affect interactions with a
MediaType
equal to email
.
The following are the steps which the interaction will pass through:
•
The interaction is submitted by E-mail Server and is placed into the iWD_New
queue.
290 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
•
The interaction is processed by the
Classification strategy. As a result, the classification business rules will be applied to interaction. In this example,
ServiceType
will be set to
ChangeAddress
. Also, the initial
Priority
will be set to
100
and the initial
Reprioritization
time will be set to in 2 hours
.
•
The interaction is placed into the iWD_Captured
queue.
•
The interaction is processed by the
Prioritization
strategy. As a result, the prioritization business rules will be applied to interaction. In this example we have set the initial priority in classification rules, so prioritization rules will be used on the reprioritization step.
•
The interaction is placed into the iWD_Queued
queue.
•
In this example, if no available agents are found, the e-mail interaction will be reprioritized every 2 hours. Its priority will be increased by 5 each time.
Example 2—Departments and Processes
In this example more iWD business objects will be added. This example will show how one flow of interactions can be divided into three streams, and how different business rules can be applied to each stream. In this example the default iWD business process is used for processing Genesys e-mails.
Use Case
In this example the following scenario is used: all interactions with
MediaType
should be divided into three groups based on
Subject
:
NewAccount,
Support,
and all others. All interactions will be delivered to one Agent Group
(
IWD
), but interactions with
Subject = NewAccount
will have highest priority and will be reprioritized more often. Interactions with
Subject = Support
will have lower priority and all other interactions will have the lowest priority and will be reprioritized less often.
Create a
Department and
Processes in iWD
Rules Creation
Create the Department and Processes in iWD. The following steps are keyed to
1. Select Departments & Processes.
2. Select your iWD tenant.
3. Select
New Department.
4. Enter a name for the new department (in this example,
CustomerService
).
5. Click
Save.
Deployment Guide 291
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 113:Create Department
Create a new process under the new department. The following steps are keyed
to the numbers in Figure 114 .
1. Select
New Process.
2. Enter a name for the process (in this example, Sales ).
3. Click
Save
.
4. Create two more processes under the
CustomerService
department:
Support and
Others
.
292 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 114:Create Process
Create Global
Classification
Rules
Create new Global classification rules as shown in Figure 115 ,
. Remember to save each rule.
Figure 115:Classification Rules for Example 2—Rule 1
Deployment Guide 293
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels
Figure 116:Classification Rules for Example 2—Rule 2
Examples
Figure 117:Classification Rules for Example 2—Rule 3
Create
Classification
Rules for each
Process
Create a new classification rule for each process (use
as an example).
For the
Sales
process:
Action
Set Priority 100
For the
Support
process:
Action Set Priority 50
For the
Others
process:
Action
Set Priority 10
294 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 118:Example Classification Rule for a Process
Create
Prioritization
Rules for the
Processes
Create prioritization rules for your processes. See
For the
Sales
process, create the rules outlined in
Table 62: Sales Process Prioritization Rules
Rule Name
McrSlt1Prior1Sales
McrSlt1Prior2Sales
Conditions
If Reprioritization was not set up
If Reprioritization was set up and in the past
Actions
Reprioritize after 1 hour
Reprioritize after 1 hour
Increase priority 10
For the Support process, create the rules outlined in
.
Table 63: Support Process Prioritization Rules
Rule Name Conditions
McrSlt1Prior1Support If Reprioritization was not set up
McrSlt1Prior2Support If Reprioritization was set up and in the past
Actions
Reprioritize after 2 hours
Reprioritize after 2 hours
Increase priority 5
Deployment Guide 295
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
For the
Others
process, create the rules outlined in
.
Table 64: Others Process Prioritization Rules
Rule Name
McrSlt1Prior1Others
McrSlt1Prior2Others
Conditions
If Reprioritization was not set up
If Reprioritization was set up and in the past
Actions
Reprioritize after 3 hours
Reprioritize after 3 hours
Increase priority 1
For rules in this example order is not important, but order can be important for other cases. You can change order of your rules by using the arrow buttons that are circled in
.
Figure 119:Prioritization Rules for the Others Process
Deploy Changes
Deploy your modifications. Refer to page 289 .
Path of E-mail Interactions in IWDBP
All business rules will only affect interactions with a MediaType equal to email .
The following are the steps which the interaction will pass through:
•
The interaction is submitted by E-mail server and is placed into the iWD_New queue.
•
The interaction is processed by the Classification strategy. As a result, the classification business rules will be applied to the interaction. In this example, interaction will be assigned to one of the iWD processes depending on
Subject.
•
Classification rules from the assigned process will be applied. As a result, the initial
Priority
will be set—
100
for the
Sales
process,
50
for the
Support
process, and
10
for the
Others
process.
296 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
•
The interaction is placed into the iWD_Captured
queue.
•
The interaction is processed by the
Prioritization
strategy. As a result, prioritization business rules from the previously assigned process will be applied to the interaction. In this example it means that the interaction will be scheduled for reprioritization (each hour for the
Sales
process, every 2 hours for the
Support
process, and every 3 hours for the
Others
process).
•
The interaction is placed into the iWD_Queued
queue.
•
In this example, if no available agents are found, the interaction will be passed into the
Prioritization
strategy based on the schedule that was set up earlier, and the
Priority
will be increased based on the assigned process.
How to Modify IWDBP to Allow Agents to Reply to
Inbound E-mails and Send Single Outbound E-mails
This section describes how to modify the iWD business process to allow agents to send replies to inbound e-mails, and to send single outbound e-mails.
There are 2 options: create a new queue and a new strategy in
IWDBP
, or use an existing business process. In this example an existing business process will be used to illustrate how other business processes can be used from the iWD business process.
First, choose a business process to handle agent’s replies and outbound e-mails. Second, specify the queue into which the agent’s reply will be placed.
Third, specify the business process and queue for single outbound e-mails from agents.
In this example the
ABC Simple
business process will process agent’s replies
(with the
Outbound
queue). Also agents will be given the ability to place interactions into the following queues in IWDBP : iWD_Completed and iWD_Canceled
. All of this will be done in the
Distribution strategy. The Route
Interaction properties in the strategy must be as shown in
Deployment Guide 297
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 120:Route Interaction Properties
Next, assign the E-mail Server that will process the outbound e-mail interactions. To do this in the
ABC Simple business process, open the
Send ABC strategy. In the Send Email property, select the E-mail Server (see
298 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Figure 121:Select E-Mail Server
After these modifications the iWD business process should look like
Figure 122:iWD Business Process after Modifications
Save all modifications and run all participating strategies.
Deployment Guide 299
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels
ABC Simple
business process.
Examples
Figure 123:ABC Simple Business Process
Note:
In this example only one endpoint is configured for E-mail Server, so there is no connection between E-mail Server and the Inbound queue in the
ABC Simple business process.
Example 3—How to Add Another Solution
One iWD business process serves one iWD tenant. One iWD tenant can have several iWD solutions. This example shows how to modify the default iWD business process to make it serve several iWD solutions.
Assume that you want to have two business solutions: one for e-mail interactions (exactly as in Example 2) and a second solution for fax interactions. Fax interactions will be submitted by an XML capture point
(
MediaType = fax
). In this example, the only difference between these two solutions will be the MediaType of interactions.
Environment
There are two streams of input interactions: one from E-mail Server (
MediaType
= email ) and second one from an XML capture point.
Use Case
In this scenario, all interactions from E-mail Server have to pass through business rules that are configured inside of Solution1 . All interactions that are submitted by the XML Capture Point have to pass through business rules that are configured inside of
Solution2
, which is the solution to which this capture point belongs. Generally, any kind of interaction can be passed into the iWD business process, but, due to the rules configuration, business rules will be applied to interactions with
MediaType = email
(business rules in
Solution1
) and to interactions with
MediaType = fax
(business rules in
Solution2
).
Business rules can be completely different in both solutions, in this example they are created identically, just for simplicity.
300 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Create a Solution
Configuration
Create a solution. The following steps are keyed to the numbers in
1. Select your iWD tenant (in this example, Mcr ).
2. Select
New Solution Instance
.
3. Enter a name for the solution (in this example,
McrSolution2
).
4. Click
Save
.
Figure 124:Create a Solution—Example 3
Deployment Guide 301
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels
Create Services
Create all necessary services under the new solution. See
.
Examples
Figure 125:Create Services for the New Solution
Create Department and Processes
Create
Classification
Rules
Create
Prioritization
Rules
Deploy
Modifications
Create new Global classification rules as exactly as in Example 2 (see “Create
Global Classification Rules” on page 293
), but specify fax as the MediaType .
Create new prioritization rules as exactly as in Example 2 (see “Create
Prioritization Rules for the Processes” on page 295
), but specify fax as the
MediaType
.
Deploy your modifications, as described in “Deploy Modifications” on page 289
.
302 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
Update the
Interaction Server
Configuration
Currently iWD supports only one ESP Server per solution. Each ESP Server has to have its own Application configured in Configuration Manager or
Genesys Administrator. Therefore, we have to create another Application and add it to the
Connections
tab of the Interaction Server application. See
Figure 126:Add ESP Server to Interaction Server’s Connections
Modify the Default
Business Process
The business process has to be updated to choose the correct ESP Server to invoke from inside the strategy, based on Solution ID. A List Object is used to
make a link between the ESP Server and the solution. See “Configuration of
List Objects” on page 252 for more information.
After installation the List Object
Iwd_Esp_List
is empty. In this case,
Interaction Server will select an ESP Server from one of the Third Party
Servers in its
Connections
tab based on load balancing. Since Example 3 uses two solutions, edit the List Object to reflect the two solutions. The following steps are keyed to the numbers in
Figure 127 . Open IRD and select the correct
tenant, then do the following:
1. Select
Routing Design.
2. Select the group List Objects.
3. Select the List Object named
Iwd_Esp_List
.
4. Select item
ESPServerList.
5. Enter the Solution ID you attached to the e-mail interaction, as described
“Adding Required Properties to Interactions” on page 275
. If you did not attach an iWD Solution ID to the e-mail interaction, enter empty
as the key.
6. Enter the application name in Configuration Manager (or Genesys
Administrator) for the ESP Service from Example2 as a value.
7. Enter the solution ID from Example 3 (
McrSlt2
) as a key.
8. Enter application name in Configuration Manager (or Genesys
Administrator) for the ESP Service from Example 3 as a value
(
Mcr801_Solution2_ESPServer)
.
Deployment Guide 303
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
9. Save the List Object by clicking
OK
.
Note:
In Step 5 , if a Solution ID was not added to the e-mail interaction,
empty must be entered as the key because Solution2 is intended to process interactions which were submitted not by an iWD capture point, but by Genesys Media servers (E-mail, Chat, and so on) and therefore do not have a solution ID, unless explicitly added as
described in “Adding Required Properties to Interactions” on page 275
. The key word empty
must be entered exactly as in
Figure 127:Update the List Object
Path of Interaction
Some important steps are taken in the Classification strategy. As soon as an interaction is placed in the strategy a decision is made as to which ESP Server to invoke for this interaction. This decision is made based on the presence and value of of the key-value pair IWD_solutionId in the user data of the
304 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples interaction. Interactions that were created by iWD capture points will have this key-value pair and the Solution ID will equal the ID of the Solution to which this Capture Point belongs.
•
If the key-value pair is missing from user data, then the ESP Server will be taken from the List Object
Iwd_Esp_List
, item
ESPServerList
, value for key empty
(all interactions submitted by E-mail server will not have the key-value pair, and therefore in this example
Mcr801_Solution1_ESPServer will be chosen).
•
If the key-value pair is found and matches with a key in List Object
Iwd_Esp_List
, item
ESPServerList
, then the corresponding ESP Server will be chosen (in this sample each interaction submitted by XML Capture
Point will have key-value pair IWD_solutionId = McrSlt2 , and therefore
ESP Server
Mcr801_Solution2_ESPServer
will be chosen for these interactions).
•
If the key-value pair
IWD_solutionId
is found but does not match with any key in List Object
Iwd_Esp_List
, item
ESPServerList
, then the ESP Server will be chosen by Interaction Server and the result is unpredictable
(Interaction Server will select one of Third Party Servers in its
Connections tab based on load balancing).
Path of Interactions Submitted by E-mail Server
The following flow is used for interactions that are submitted by E-mail Server
(
MediaType = email
):
•
The interaction is submitted by E-mail Server and is placed into the iWD_New queue.
•
The interaction is processed by the
Classification
strategy. ESP Server
Mcr801_Solution1_ESPServer
will be assigned and invoked. As a result, classification business rules will be applied to the interaction. In this example, the interaction will be assigned to one of the iWD business processes depending on
Subject
.
•
Classification rules from the assigned process will be applied. As a result, the initial
Priority
will be set—
100
for the
Sales
process,
50
for the
Support
process and
10
for the
Others
process.
•
The interaction is placed into the iWD_Captured
queue.
•
The interaction is processed by the
Prioritization
strategy. As a result, prioritization business rules from the previously assigned process will be applied to the interaction. In this example, that means that the interaction will be scheduled for reprioritization (each hour for the
Sales
process, every 2 hours for the
Support
process, and every 3 hours for the
Others process).
•
The interaction is placed into the iWD_Queued
queue.
Deployment Guide 305
Appendix C: Adapting the iWD Business Process for Standard Genesys Channels Examples
•
In this example, if no available agents are found, the interaction will be passed to the
Prioritization
strategy based on the schedule that was set up earlier and the
Priority
will be increased based on assigned process.
Path of Interactions Submitted by a Capture Point
As was stated earlier, the two solutions are identical, and the only difference is that Solution1 will apply business rules to e-mail interactions, and Solution2 will apply business rules to fax interactions. Therefore the following flow is the same as above for e-mail interactions except for the ESP Server. You can modify business rules for these interactions however you wish.
The following flow is used for interactions that are submitted by a Capture
Point ( MediaType = fax ):
•
The interaction is submitted by an XML Capture Point and is placed into the iWD_New queue.
•
The interaction is processed by the
Classification
strategy. ESP Server
Mcr801_Solution2_ESPServer
will be assigned and invoked. As a result, classification business rules will be applied to the interaction. In this example, the interaction will be assigned to one of the iWD business processes depending on
Subject
.
•
Classification rules from the assigned process will be applied. As a result, the initial
Priority
will be set—
100
for the
Sales
process,
50
for the
Support
process and
10
for the
Others
process.
•
The interaction is placed into the iWD_Captured
queue.
•
The interaction is processed by the
Prioritization
strategy. As a result, prioritization business rules from the previously assigned process will be applied to the interaction. In this example, that means that the interaction will be scheduled for reprioritization (each hour for the
Sales
process, every 2 hours for the
Support
process, and every 3 hours for the
Others process).
•
The interaction is placed into the iWD_Queued
queue.
•
In this example, if no available agents are found, the interaction will be passed to the Prioritization strategy based on the schedule that was set up earlier and the
Priority
will be increased based on assigned process.
306 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix
D
iWD Rules and Existing
Business Processes
This Appendix explains how to use iWD business rules functionality with existing business processes. It explains what modifications have to be done in order to use iWD business rules within existing business processes.
This Appendix contains the following sections:
Using iWD Rules in Existing Business Processes, page 307
Using iWD Rules in Existing Business
Processes
Remember that because you are not using the standard
IWDBP
, if you view these interactions in the Global Task List, sometimes the
Status
column will be empty. This is because the
Status
reported through the Global Task List is taken from the name of the queue in which the interaction is placed within the
Business Process, and the Global Task List assumes that these queues all have names beginning with iWD_
. Therefore, when the interaction is located in any other queue, such as
Inbound
in this example, it will not be displayed in the
Status
column.
Requirements:
•
A Genesys E-mail solution is installed. (An e-mail solution is used in the example. Modifications will be the same for any other type of media).
•
An iWD solution is installed.
Deployment Guide 307
Appendix D: iWD Rules and Existing Business Processes Using iWD Rules in Existing Business Processes
Assumptions:
•
There is only one iWD solution per business process. If you want to use a business process in several iWD solutions, you must:
For iWD native interactions (which always have
IWD_solutionId
): change the List Object
Iwd_Esp_List
accordingly (see
“Configuration of List Objects” on page 252 ).
Note:
“Native interactions” refers to interactions captured by an iWD capture adapter. Interactions going through the iWD
Business Process that do not come through an iWD capture adapter (that is, interactions coming into the system from a standard Genesys media server, through a Gplus Adapter, or through an integration built with the Genesys Open Media
SDK) are referred to as “non-native” or “foreign” interactions.
For non-native interactions (which do not have IWD_solutionId ): change the logic for assigning solutionId
, based on an interaction’s property, in the
IWD_BusinessRules_Ext
strategy (
Assign Properties block with comment solutionId = ‘Your_solution_id’
).
shows the strategy.
•
Interactions with
MediaType = email
are the only interactions that come as input into existing business processes. If you expect interactions of several media types as input, you must adjust classification rules in iWD Manager accordingly (add condition “Media type is” ).
•
There is only one Agent Group to which the interactions can be assigned.
If you want to use several Agent Groups you must modify the target selection in the
Process ABC
strategy, which is part of the
ABC Simple BP business process that comes with eServices Interaction Workflow installation.
ABC Simple BP
The example uses the ABC Simple BP business process that comes with
eServices Interaction Workflow installation. See Figure 128
.
Figure 128:ABC Simple BP
308 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix D: iWD Rules and Existing Business Processes Example
Example
This is a simple example that shows how a business process could be modified to use iWD rules.
Use Case
In this scenario, there is a working business process, and you want to deliver interactions to agents based on priority. Priority should be assigned based on e-mail subject.
All incoming interactions (in this example they all have
MediaType = email
) should be divided into three groups based on Subject : NewAccount, Support, and all others. All interactions will be delivered to one Agent Group (
IWD
), but interactions with
Subject = NewAccount
will have highest priority and will be reprioritized more often. Interactions with
Subject = Support
will have lower priority and all other interactions will have the lowest priority and will be reprioritized less often.
Modify the Existing Business Process
Modify the existing business process. Add one more strategy, which will invoke the iWD service to apply business rules. Also, one queue will be added to the business process. This queue will provide the mechanism for reprioritization and delivering interactions to an agent based on priority.
The iWD Setup Utility includes a sample business process that contains a couple of strategies and a queue.
ABC IWD Simple BP business process.
Figure 129:ABC IWD Simple BP
In this business process, the property of the
All by priority
view is
configured as shown in Figure 129
(the
Conditions
tab is empty). Thus,
Deployment Guide 309
Appendix D: iWD Rules and Existing Business Processes Example interactions from this queue and through this view will be taken by priority.
The interaction with the highest priority will be taken first.
310
Figure 130:All by Priority Interaction Queue View Properties
Properties of the
To reprioritize
view are configured as in Figure 131 and
Figure 132 . Thus, interactions from this queue and through this view will be
taken sorted by
IWD_reprioritizeDateTime
; and only if
IWD_reprioritizeDateTime
was set and has expired.
Figure 131:‘To Reprioritize’ Properties—Condition Tab
intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix D: iWD Rules and Existing Business Processes
Figure 132:‘To Reprioritize’ Properties—Order Tab
Figure 133 shows the iWD Business Rules Ext strategy.
Example
Figure 133:iWD Business Rules Ext Strategy
iWD_Reprioritization_Ext
strategy. The key-value pair
IWD_solutionId
will always be attached after the
IWD_BusinessRules_Ext
Deployment Guide 311
Appendix D: iWD Rules and Existing Business Processes Example strategy. This is why no check is made for the presence of that key-value pair in the strategy.
Figure 134:iWD Reprioritization Ext Strategy
Move the iWD_Processed queue, as well as the iWD_BusinessRules_Ext and iWD_Reprioritization_Ext
strategies from the
ABC IWD Simple BP business process to the
ABC Simple BP
business process. Figure 135 shows how the
ABC
Simple BP
will look at this point.
Figure 135:ABC Simple BP with Queue and Strategies Added
Insert the added group between
Inbound queue
and
Process ABC
.
shows how the
ABC Simple BP
business process will look at this point.
Figure 136:ABC Simple BP with Group Added
The existing business process is now updated. Next, create business rules in iWD.
312 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Appendix D: iWD Rules and Existing Business Processes Example
Rules creation
Open iWD Manager and modify the Standard Rules Template as described in
“Modify the Standard Rules Template” on page 285
. Assume that all incoming interactions have
MediaType = email
, so you only need to add the four new
Actions.
Create an iWD Tenant and an iWD Solution, as described in “iWD
.
Create a department and processes as described in “Create a Department and
.
Create new Global classification rules as described in “Create Global
Classification Rules” on page 293
(in this example we do not check media type, assuming that all interactions have
MediaType = email
).
Create prioritization rules for your processes as described in“Create
Prioritization Rules for the Processes” on page 295
.
Deploy your modifications.
Path of E-mail Interactions
The following are the steps which the interaction will pass through:
•
The interaction is submitted by E-mail server and is placed into the
Inbound queue.
•
The interaction is processed by the
IWD_BusinessRules_Ext
strategy:
The
SetBusinessContext
method of the ESP Service is invoked:
First, global classification rules are applied. As a result, the interaction will be assigned to one of iWD processes depending on
Subject.
Immediately after global classification rules are applied, classification rules of the assigned Department and Process will be applied. As a result, the initial
Priority
will be set—
100
for the
Sales
process,
50
for the
Support
process, and
10
for the
Others process.
The Classification step is completed.
The Prioritize method of the ESP Service is invoked:
As a result, prioritization business rules from the previously assigned process will be applied to the interaction. In this example, that means that the interaction will be scheduled for reprioritization
(each hour for the
Sales
process, every 2 hours for the
Support process, and every 3 hours for the
Others
process).
The Prioritization step is completed.
•
The
IWD_BusinessRules_Ext
strategy is completed and the interaction is placed into the iWD_Processed
queue.
Deployment Guide 313
Appendix D: iWD Rules and Existing Business Processes Example
•
In this example, if no available agents are found, the interaction will be passed to the
IWD_Reprioritization_Ext
strategy based on the schedule that was set up earlier. Priority will be increased based on the prioritization rules specified in the assigned process. Interaction will be rescheduled for reprioritization and placed back into the iWD_Processed
queue.
314 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Supplements
Related Documentation
Resources
The following resources provide additional information that is relevant to this software. Consult these additional resources as necessary.
intelligent Workload Distribution (iWD)
•
iWD Data Mart Reference Manual, which describes/provides information about the iWD Data Mart.
•
iWD WebSphere MQ Capture Adapter Reference Guide, which provides installation and configuration information for the WebSphere MQ Capture
Adapter.
In addition, the https://sites.google.com/a/iwdlab.com/iwd8/
website provides additional information about working with iWD. The content on this website is updated frequently.
eServices
•
eServices 8.0 Deployment Guide, which includes a high-level overview of features and functions of Genesys eServices together with architecture information and deployment-planning materials. It also introduces you to some of the basic concepts and terminology that are used in this product.
The eServices Deployment Guide also provides information about deploying the JMS Integrated Capture Point.
•
eServices 8.0 User’s Guide, which provides overall information and recommendations on the use and operation of Genesys eServices, and the use and operation of the JMS Integrated Capture Point.
•
eServices 8.0 Reference Manual, which provides information about the configuration options for each eServices component, including options specific to the JMS Integrated Capture Point.
•
eServices 8.0 Open Media Interaction Models Reference Manual, which presents a set of basic interaction models—showing the components that are involved and the messaging (requests, events) among them.
Deployment Guide 315
Related Documentation Resources
•
“eServices Log Events” in the Framework 8.0 Combined Log Events Help, which is a comprehensive list and description of all events that may be recorded in Management Layer logs.
Genesys
•
Genesys Technical Publications Glossary, which ships on the Genesys
Documentation Library DVD and which provides a comprehensive list of the Genesys and computer-telephony integration (CTI) terminology and acronyms used in this document.
•
Genesys Migration Guide, which ships on the Genesys Documentation
Library DVD, and which provides documented migration strategies for
Genesys product releases. Contact Genesys Technical Support for more information.
•
Release Notes and Product Advisories for this product, which are available on the Genesys Technical Support website at http://genesyslab.com/support .
Information about supported hardware and third-party software is available on the Genesys Technical Support website in the following documents:
•
Genesys Supported Operating Environment Reference Manual
•
Genesys Supported Media Interfaces Reference Manual
Consult these additional resources as necessary:
•
Genesys Hardware Sizing Guide, which provides information about
Genesys hardware sizing guidelines for the Genesys 8.x releases.
•
Genesys Interoperability Guide, which provides information on the compatibility of Genesys products with various Configuration Layer
Environments; Interoperability of Reporting Templates and Solutions; and
Gplus Adapters Interoperability.
•
Genesys Licensing Guide, which introduces you to the concepts, terminology, and procedures that are relevant to the Genesys licensing system.
•
Genesys Database Sizing Estimator 8.x Worksheets, which provides a range of expected database sizes for various Genesys products.
For additional system-wide planning tools and information, see the release-specific listings of System Level Documents on the Genesys Technical
Support website. These documents are accessible from the system level documents by release
tab in the Knowledge Base
Browse Documents
Section.
Genesys product documentation is available on the:
•
Genesys Technical Support website at http://genesyslab.com/support
.
•
Genesys Documentation wiki at http://docs.genesyslab.com/ .
316 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Related Documentation Resources
•
Genesys Documentation Library DVD and/or the Developer
Documentation CD, which you can order by e-mail from Genesys Order
Management at [email protected]
.
Deployment Guide 317
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
This document uses certain stylistic and typographical conventions— introduced here—that serve as shorthands for particular kinds of information.
Document Version Number
A version number appears at the bottom of the inside front cover of this document. Version numbers change as new information is added to this document. Here is a sample version number:
80fr_ref_06-2008_v8.0.001.00
You will need this number when you are talking with Genesys Technical
Support about this product.
Screen Captures Used in This Document
Screen captures from the product graphical user interface (GUI), as used in this document, may sometimes contain minor spelling, capitalization, or grammatical errors. The text accompanying and explaining the screen captures corrects such errors except when such a correction would prevent you from installing, configuring, or successfully using the product. For example, if the name of an option contains a usage error, the name would be presented exactly as it appears in the product GUI; the error would not be corrected in any accompanying text.
Type Styles
describes and illustrates the type conventions that are used in this document.
Table 65: Type Styles
Type Style Used For
Italic
Examples
• Document titles
• Emphasis
• Definitions of (or first references to) unfamiliar terms
• Mathematical variables
Also used to indicate placeholder text within code samples or commands, in the special case where angle brackets are a required part of the syntax (see the note about angle brackets on
).
Please consult the Genesys Migration
Guide for more information.
Do not use this value for this option.
A customary and usual practice is one that is widely accepted and used within a particular industry or profession.
The formula, x +1 = 7 where x stands for . . .
318 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Document Conventions
Table 65: Type Styles (Continued)
Type Style Used For Examples
Monospace font
(Looks like teletype
or typewriter text
)
All programming identifiers and GUI elements. This convention includes:
• The names of directories, files, folders, configuration objects, paths, scripts, dialog boxes, options, fields, text and list boxes, operational modes, all buttons (including radio buttons), check boxes, commands, tabs, CTI events, and error messages.
• The values of options.
• Logical arguments and command syntax.
• Code samples.
Also used for any text that users must manually enter during a configuration or installation procedure, or on a command line.
Select the
Show variables on screen check box.
In the
Operand
text box, enter your formula.
Click
OK
to exit the
Properties
dialog box.
T-Server distributes the error messages in
EventError
events.
If you select true
for the inbound-bsns-calls
option, all established inbound calls on a local agent are considered business calls.
Enter exit
on the command line.
Square brackets ([ ])
A particular parameter or value that is optional within a logical argument, a command, or some programming syntax. That is, the presence of the parameter or value is not required to resolve the argument, command, or block of code. The user decides whether to include this optional information.
smcp_server -host [/flags] smcp_server -host <confighost>
Angle brackets
(< >)
A placeholder for a value that the user must specify. This might be a DN or a port number specific to your enterprise.
Note: In some cases, angle brackets are required characters in code syntax (for example, in XML schemas). In these cases, italic text is used for placeholder values.
Deployment Guide 319
Document Conventions
320 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Index
Symbols
[] (square brackets)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
< > (angle brackets)
A
ABC IWD Simple BP business process
ABC Simple BP business process
Access Groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
ACME Sample Application
Actions properties and actions
ADDP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
angle brackets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Apache
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
application cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
application installation
Archive strategy
audience, for document
B
Boolean
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
BPR_iWD_Extension.jar
BPR_iWD_Extension.jar Stat Server option
brackets angle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
square
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Business Attribute
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Business Calendars view
Business Context Management
Service
creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
high availability
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
business logic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
C
CancelTask message
capacity rule
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Capture Adapters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Database
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
JMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Web Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
XML
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CCPulse+ template
centralized logging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
centralized logging configuration
Change History view
properties and actions
Classification strategy
CME Tenant
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
commenting on this document
compatibility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
completed-queues Interaction Server option
CompleteTask message
component
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Conditions properties and actions
configuration sections
Departments & Processes
Global Task List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Modules & Components
Services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuration Server
Configuration Server Connector
Service
creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
configuring a custom interaction property
centralized logging
iWD Manager logging
iWD Runtime Node logging
using the iWD Setup Utility
Context history
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
conventions in document
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Deployment Guide 321
Index type styles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CreateTask message
creating iWD Configuration database
iWD Data Mart database
iWD Runtime Node in iWD Manager
iWD Solution in iWD Manager
iWD Tenant in iWD Manager
services in iWD Manager
current-day statistics
custom properties (interaction)
D
Data Mart ETL services
Data Types
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
database iWD Configuration database
Database Capture Adapter
Database Capture Point
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Database Capture Point Service
database preparation
Database Service
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
databases
Interaction Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
DateTime
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Department Details view
Departments & Processes configuration section
Deployment
Departments and Processes
properties and actions
Solutions and Services
Details view
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
DetermineESPServerName subroutine
Direction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Distribution strategy
document audience
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
change history
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
conventions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
errors, commenting on
version number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
E
Error message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ESP block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ESP object
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Extended Statistics Service
External Service Protocol (ESP) block
F font styles italic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
monospace
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Functions tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
properties and actions
G
General configuration
Genesys Administrator
Genesys Chat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Genesys E-mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Genesys Info Mart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Genesys Interaction Server Connector
Service properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Genesys SMS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
GetTaskInfo message
Global Rules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Global Task List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
configuration section
H
Header bar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
historical reporting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
History view
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
properties and actions
HoldTask message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
I
ICON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ics_multi_media_agent_seat technical license
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Import and Export function
Import and Export view
Import/Export properties and actions
Import/Export view
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
In messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
installing
Interaction Server and its databases
iWD Capture
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
iWD Data Mart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
iWD Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
iWD Rules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
iWD Runtime Node
iWD Setup Utility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
iWD Stat Extensions
Integer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
322 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Index intelligent Workload Distribution features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
intended audience
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Interaction Concentrator
interaction custom properties
interaction properties mapping
Interaction Queues
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Interaction Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Interaction Server Connector
Service
creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Interaction Server database
interactions table
italics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
iWD
system configuration
Configuration database
features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
iWD application
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
iWD business process
iWD business rules using within an existing business process
iWD CDs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
iWD Extended Statistics Service
iWD installation preparation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
prerequisites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
iWD Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
iWD Rules Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
iWD services recommended configuration order
iWD Setup Utility installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
iWD solution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
iWD state model
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
IWD_BusinessRules_Ext strategy
iWD_Canceled queue
iWD_Captured queue
iWD_Completed queue
iWD_ErrorHeld queue
Iwd_Esp_List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
iWD_New queue
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
iWD_Queued queue
iWD_Rejected queue
iWD_Reprioritization_Ext strategy
IWDBP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
adapting for standard Genesys channels
strategies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
J
Java SDK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
java-extension-jar Stat Server option
jaxb-api.jar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
jaxb-impl.jar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
jdbc-driver Stat Server option
jdbc-url Stat Server option
JMS Capture Point
,
K
Kettle ETL Service
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
L
Last Viewed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
licensing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
List Object
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Log Viewer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
log4j.properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Logging Service
creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
logs
Management Layer
lookup tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Lookup Tables view
M managed tenant
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Managed Tenant Details view
Managed Tenant view properties and actions
Management Layer logging
Message Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
messages
CancelTask
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
CompleteTask
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
CreateTask
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Error
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
GetTaskInfo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
HoldTask
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Ping
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Pong
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
RestartTask
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
ResumeTask
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Task Action
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Task Notification
TaskAssigned
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
TaskCanceled
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
TaskCompleted
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
TaskCreated
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Deployment Guide 323
Index
TaskDistributedQueue
TaskErrorHeld
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
TaskHeld
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
TaskInfo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
TaskRejected
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
TaskRestarted
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
TaskResumed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
TaskUpdated
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
UpdateTask
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Metric template value types
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Metrics templates
Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Modules & Components configuration section
Modules view properties and actions
monospace font
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
N native interactions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Navigation panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
navigation sections
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
navigation tree
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
navigation sections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Navigational panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
O
Object Actions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Open Media API
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Out messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
P
Parameters tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
properties and actions
password encoder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
password Stat Server option
passwordEncoder.cmd file
Person
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Ping message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Pong message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Prioritization strategy
Process Details view
Profile view
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
properties and actions
R refresh-interval Stat Server option
Reporting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
RestartTask message
ResumeTask message
Rule Template view properties and actions
Rule templates
Rules Service
creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Rules view
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Runtime Nodes view
properties and actions
S sample application
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Scheduled ETL Job Service
Scheduled ETL Job service
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Scripting Service
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Security Policies properties and actions
Security Policies view
Security Policy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Service Details view
properties and actions
Service templates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Services configuration section
Configuration Server Connector
Data Mart ETL Services
Kettle ETL Service
Data Mart ETL services
Database Capture Point
Database service
Interaction Server Connector Service
iWD Extended Statistics Service
Logging Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Rules Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Scheduled ETL Job Services
Scripting Service
Web Service Capture Point
XML File Capture Point Service
Services configuration section
Services view
properties and actions
Setup Utility
Solution Details view
properties and actions
Solutions and Services
square brackets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Standard Genesys to IWD adapter business process
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Stat Server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
324 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
Index
Stat Server configuration options
Statistics Adapter Service
String
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
T
Task Action messages
task attribute mapping
task life cycle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Task Notification messages
TaskAssigned message
TaskCanceled message
TaskCompleted message
TaskCreated message
TaskDistributedQueue message
TaskErrorHeld message
TaskHeld message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
TaskInfo message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
TaskRejected message
TaskRestarted message
TaskResumed message
Tasks distribution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
prioritization
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
reprioritization
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TaskUpdated message
Tenant Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
tenant-level configuration
Tomcat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
type styles conventions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
italic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
monospace
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
typographical styles
U
Unsaved Changes dialog box
UpdateTask message
updating
Interaction Server databases
URS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
User
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
User Access
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
User Profile
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
user Stat Server option
V verbose Stat Server option
version numbering, document
W
Web Service Capture Adapter
Web Service Capture Point
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Web Service Capture Point Service
WebSphere
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
WebSphere MQ Capture Point Service
WFM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
WFM Connector Service
Workforce Management
Workforce Management Connector Service
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
workitem
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
X
XML Capture Adapter
XML File Capture Point Service
properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Deployment Guide 325
Index
326 intelligent Workload Distribution 8.0
ডাউনলোড
বিজ্ঞাপন